JP6566649B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP6566649B2
JP6566649B2 JP2015016533A JP2015016533A JP6566649B2 JP 6566649 B2 JP6566649 B2 JP 6566649B2 JP 2015016533 A JP2015016533 A JP 2015016533A JP 2015016533 A JP2015016533 A JP 2015016533A JP 6566649 B2 JP6566649 B2 JP 6566649B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
lever
eccentric cam
state
main body
lock
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2015016533A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2016087403A (en
Inventor
飯島 航
航 飯島
裕嗣 田丸
裕嗣 田丸
拓也 串田
拓也 串田
村瀬 勇人
勇人 村瀬
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd filed Critical Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority to JP2015016533A priority Critical patent/JP6566649B2/en
Publication of JP2016087403A publication Critical patent/JP2016087403A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6566649B2 publication Critical patent/JP6566649B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)

Description

本発明は、パチンコ機などの遊技機に関するものである。   The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

パチンコ機などの遊技機において、遊技者が手動操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が規制部材によって所定位置で移動を規制される遊技機がある(特許文献1)。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a movement member that moves between a first position and a second position by a manual operation by a player is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a restriction member (Patent Document) 1).

特開2014−144218号公報JP 2014-144218 A

しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、規制部材の耐久性に改良の余地があるという問題点があった。   However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the durability of the regulating member.

本発明は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、規制部材の耐久性の良好な遊技機を提供することを目的とする。   The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with good durability of the regulating member.

この目的を達成するために本発明の遊技機は、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材の移動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され前記規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、前記移動部材の少なくとも一部は、前記操作部材の操作中に前記被規制部材が前記規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、前記操作部材に、前記移動部材の少なくとも一部を前記被規制部材に対する所定の基準配置に維持するように作用する力以上の荷重が作用することにより、前記所定の基準配置から変位可能に構成され、前記規制部材は、移動可能に構成され、前記移動部材の少なくとも一部であって前記変位が生じた部分が前記所定の基準配置に戻った時の位置で、前記被規制部材を、遊技者側から前記操作部材に前記荷重が作用していない状態で維持可能に構成され、前記移動部材の少なくとも一部は、前記第1位置に前記移動部材が配置された場合における前記所定の基準配置からの変位量が所定量まで許容され、前記第2位置に前記移動部材が配置された場合における前記所定の基準配置からの変位量が前記所定量よりも大きな第2所定量まで許容される。 In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation, a regulating member that regulates the movement of the moving member, a gaming machine comprising, said moving member comprises an operating member player operates, and the controlled member, which is capable restricting the movement to the regulating member is coupled to the operation member, the moving member At least a portion of the movable member in a state in which movement of the restricted member is restricted by the restricting member during operation of the operating member . by load exceeding the force acting to maintain the reference arrangement acts, is displaceably constructed from the predetermined reference arrangement, the restricting member is movably constructed, at least a portion of said movable member There In position when the portion whose serial displacement occurs has returned to the predetermined standard configuration, said the controlled member, said load to said operating member from the player's side is configured to be maintained in a state where no action, the At least a part of the moving member is allowed to have a predetermined amount of displacement from the predetermined reference arrangement when the moving member is arranged at the first position, and the moving member is arranged at the second position. displacement from the predetermined reference arrangement when is its permissible operating until larger second predetermined amount than the predetermined amount.

請求項1記載の遊技機によれば、規制部材の耐久性を良好にすることができる。   According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the durability of the regulating member can be improved.

請求項2記載の遊技機によれば、請求項1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、基板ボックスの内部に収納されている制御装置で、操作の検出を行うことができる。 According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect , the operation can be detected by the control device housed inside the board box.

第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機の正面図である。It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. パチンコ機の遊技盤の正面図である。It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の背面図である。It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a)は、パチンコ機の部分正面図であり、(b)は、図6(a)のVIb−VIb線におけるパチンコ機の部分断面図である。(A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (a)は、パチンコ機の部分正面図であり、(b)は、図7(a)のVIIb−VIIb線におけるパチンコ機の部分断面図である。(A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a). 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of an operation device. 首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の分解正面斜視図である。It is a disassembled front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. レバー部材の本体部材、上部カバー部材、下部カバー部材及び首振り部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swinging member. 首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、偏心カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図14(a)のXIVc−XIVc線における偏心カム部材の断面図である。(A) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member taken along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. It is. (a)は、位相検出部材の正面図であり、(b)は、位相検出部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図15(a)のXVc−XVc線における位相検出部材の断面図である。(A) is a front view of a phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member along line XVc-XVc in FIG. It is. (a)は、レバー部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材の側面図であり、(c)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材の上面図である。(A) is a front view of a lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in the direction view. (a)は、操作デバイスの正面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)の矢印XVIIb方向視における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) is a front view of an operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device in the arrow XVIIb direction view of Fig.17 (a). (a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIb−XVIIIb線における操作デバイスの部分断面図であり、(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 図18(a)の首振り操作部材の部分拡大図である。It is the elements on larger scale of the swing operation member of Fig.18 (a). 図17(b)のXX−XX線における首振り操作部材の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in the XX-XX line of FIG.17 (b). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and lever member in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第2実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)は、偏心カム部材のカム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図30(a)の矢印XXXb方向視におけるカム部材の側面図であり、(c)は、偏心カム部材の本体部材の正面図であり、(d)は、図30(c)の矢印XXXd方向視における本体部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of a main-body member, (d) is a side view of a main-body member in the arrow XXXd direction view of FIG.30 (c). (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は図31(a)のXXXIb方向視における偏心カム部材の側面図であり、(c)は、偏心カム部材の正面図である。(A) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. . (a)は、ロック解除カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図32(a)のXXXIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図32(a)のXXXIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the XXXIIc direction view. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図33(a)のXXXIIIb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a). (a)から(d)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック部材及びロック解除カム部材の正面図である。(A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (a)から(c)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック部材及びロック解除カム部材の正面図である。(A) to (c) is a front view of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (a)から(c)は、軸支棒の軸方向視で図示した首振り部材の本体部材の正面図である。(A) to (c) is a front view of the main body member of the swing member illustrated in the axial view of the shaft support rod. (a)は、モータ固定板の上面図であり、(b)は、図37(a)のXXXVIIb方向視におけるモータ固定板の側面図であり、(c)は、図37(b)に示す状態からU字状部材がスライド移動された状態を示すモータ固定板の側面図である。(A) is a top view of a motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state by which the U-shaped member was slid from the state. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第3実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 3rd Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). 第4実施形態における操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図44(a)のXXXXIVb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (a)及び(b)は、ロック部材の側面図である。(A) And (b) is a side view of a locking member. レバー部材及び首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)は、レバー部材の本体部材及びロック受け部材の上面図であり、(b)及び(c)は、図53(a)のLIIIb方向視におけるレバー部材の本体部材及びロック受け部材の側面図である。(A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side views of the main body member of the lever member and the side of the lock receiving member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). FIG. (a)及び(b)は、図6のVIb―VIb線で断面視したパチンコ機及び操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine and operation device which looked at the cross section by the VIb-VIb line | wire of FIG. 第5実施形態における内側ケース部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front exploded perspective view of an inner case member in a 5th embodiment. (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図56(a)のLVIb方向視における偏心カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図56(a)のLVIc方向視における偏心カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the direction view. (a)は、ロック解除カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図57(a)のLVIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図57(a)のLVIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図58(a)のLVIII方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)から(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) to (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member that represent operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member. (a)及び(b)は、第6実施形態におけるレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) And (b) is a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member representing the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in the sixth embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第7実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in 7th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第8実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 8th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、第9実施形態における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) And (b) is a side view of the operation device in 9th Embodiment. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第10実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 10th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第11実施形態における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and lever member in 11th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第12実施形態における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and lever member in 12th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a).

以下、本発明の実施形態について、添付図面を参照して説明する。まず、図1から図27を参照し、第1実施形態として、本発明をパチンコ遊技機(以下、単に「パチンコ機」という)10に適用した場合の一実施形態について説明する。図1は、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10の正面図であり、図2はパチンコ機10の遊技盤13の正面図であり、図3はパチンコ機10の背面図である。   Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 27, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

図1に示すように、パチンコ機10は、略矩形状に組み合わせた木枠により外殻が形成される外枠11と、その外枠11と略同一の外形形状に形成され外枠11に対して開閉可能に支持された内枠12とを備えている。外枠11には、内枠12を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ18が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ18が設けられた側を開閉の軸として内枠12が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。   As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

内枠12には、多数の釘や入賞口63,64等を有する遊技盤13(図2参照)が裏面側から着脱可能に装着される。この遊技盤13の正面を球(遊技球)が流下することにより弾球遊技が行われる。なお、内枠12には、球を遊技盤13の正面領域に発射する球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)やその球発射ユニット112aから発射された球を遊技盤13の正面領域まで誘導する発射レール(図示せず)等が取り付けられている。   A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

内枠12の正面側には、その正面上側を覆う正面枠14と、その下側を覆う下皿ユニット15とが設けられている。正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ19が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ19が設けられた側を開閉の軸として正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。なお、内枠12の施錠と正面枠14の施錠とは、シリンダ錠20の鍵穴21に専用の鍵を差し込んで所定の操作を行うことでそれぞれ解除される。   On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

正面枠14は、装飾用の樹脂部品や電気部品等を組み付けたものであり、その略中央部には略楕円形状に開口形成された窓部14cが設けられている。正面枠14の裏面側には2枚の板ガラスを有するガラスユニット16が配設され、そのガラスユニット16を介して遊技盤13の正面がパチンコ機10の正面側に視認可能となっている。   The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

正面枠14には、球を貯留する上皿17が正面側へ張り出して上面を開放した略箱状に形成されており、この上皿17に賞球や貸出球などが排出される。上皿17の底面は正面視(図1参照)右側に下降傾斜して形成され、その傾斜により上皿17に投入された球が球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)へと案内される。また、上皿17の上面には、枠ボタン22が設けられている。この枠ボタン22は、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で表示される演出のステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチの演出内容を変更したりする場合などに、遊技者により操作される。   On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

正面枠14には、その周囲(例えばコーナー部分)に各種ランプ等の発光手段が設けられている。これら発光手段は、大当たり時や所定のリーチ時等における遊技状態の変化に応じて、点灯又は点滅することにより発光態様が変更制御され、遊技中の演出効果を高める役割を果たす。窓部14cの周縁には、LED等の発光手段を内蔵した電飾部29〜33が設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、これら電飾部29〜33が大当たりランプ等の演出ランプとして機能し、大当たり時やリーチ演出時等には内蔵するLEDの点灯や点滅によって各電飾部29〜33が点灯または点滅して、大当たり中である旨、或いは大当たり一歩手前のリーチ中である旨が報知される。また、正面枠14の正面視(図1参照)左上部には、LED等の発光手段が内蔵され賞球の払い出し中とエラー発生時とを表示可能な表示ランプ34が設けられている。   The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or flashing of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

また、右側の電飾部32下側には、正面枠14の裏面側を視認できるように裏面側より透明樹脂を取り付けて小窓35が形成され、遊技盤13正面の貼着スペースK1(図2参照)に貼付される証紙等がパチンコ機10の正面から視認可能とされている。また、パチンコ機10においては、より煌びやかさを醸し出すために、電飾部29〜33の周りの領域にクロムメッキを施したABS樹脂製のメッキ部材36が取り付けられている。   In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

窓部14cの下方には、貸球操作部40が配設されている。貸球操作部40には、度数表示部41と、球貸しボタン42と、返却ボタン43とが設けられている。パチンコ機10の側方に配置されるカードユニット(球貸しユニット)(図示せず)に紙幣やカード等を投入した状態で貸球操作部40が操作されると、その操作に応じて球の貸出が行われる。具体的には、度数表示部41はカード等の残額情報が表示される領域であり、内蔵されたLEDが点灯して残額情報として残額が数字で表示される。球貸しボタン42は、カード等(記録媒体)に記録された情報に基づいて貸出球を得るために操作されるものであり、カード等に残額が存在する限りにおいて貸出球が上皿17に供給される。返却ボタン43は、カードユニットに挿入されたカード等の返却を求める際に操作される。なお、カードユニットを介さずに球貸し装置等から上皿17に球が直接貸し出されるパチンコ機、いわゆる現金機では貸球操作部40が不要となるが、この場合には、貸球操作部40の設置部分に飾りシール等を付加して部品構成は共通のものとしても良い。カードユニットを用いたパチンコ機と現金機との共通化を図ることができる。   A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

上皿17の下側に位置する下皿ユニット15には、その左側部に上皿17に貯留しきれなかった球を貯留するための下皿50が上面を開放した略箱状に形成されている。下皿50の右側には、球を遊技盤13の正面へ打ち込むために遊技者によって操作される操作ハンドル51及び操作デバイス300が配設される。なお、操作デバイス300については後述する。   In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

操作ハンドル51の内部には、球発射ユニット112aの駆動を許可するためのタッチセンサ51aと、押下操作している期間中には球の発射を停止する発射停止スイッチ51bと、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)を電気抵抗の変化により検出する可変抵抗器(図示せず)などが内蔵されている。操作ハンドル51が遊技者によって右回りに回動操作されると、タッチセンサ51aがオンされると共に可変抵抗器の抵抗値が回動操作量に対応して変化し、その可変抵抗器の抵抗値に対応した強さ(発射強度)で球が発射され、これにより遊技者の操作に対応した飛び量で遊技盤13の正面へ球が打ち込まれる。また、操作ハンドル51が遊技者により操作されていない状態においては、タッチセンサ51aおよび発射停止スイッチ51bがオフとなっている。   Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

下皿50の正面下方部には、下皿50に貯留された球を下方へ排出する際に操作するための球抜きレバー52が設けられている。この球抜きレバー52は、常時、右方向に付勢されており、その付勢に抗して左方向へスライドさせることにより、下皿50の底面に形成された底面口が開口して、その底面口から球が自然落下して排出される。この球抜きレバー52の操作は、通常、下皿50の下方に下皿50から排出された球を受け取る箱(一般に「千両箱」と称される)を置いた状態で行われる。下皿50の右方には、上述したように操作ハンドル51が配設され、下皿50の左方には灰皿(図示せず)が取り付けられている。   In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

図2に示すように、遊技盤13は、正面視略正方形状に切削加工したベース板60に、球案内用の多数の釘(図示せず)や風車(図示せず)の他、レール61,62、一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変入賞装置330、スルーゲート67、可変表示装置ユニット80等を組み付けて構成され、その周縁部が内枠12(図1参照)の裏面側に取り付けられる。ベース板60は光透過性の樹脂材料からなり、その正面側からベース板60の背面側に配設された各種構造体を遊技者に視認させることが可能に形成される。一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変表示装置ユニット80は、ルータ加工によってベース板60に形成された貫通穴に配設され、遊技盤13の正面側からタッピングネジ等により固定されている。   As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

遊技盤13の正面中央部分は、正面枠14の窓部14c(図1参照)を通じて内枠12の正面側から視認することができる。以下に、主に図2を参照して、遊技盤13の構成について説明する。   The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

遊技盤13の正面には、帯状の金属板を略円弧状に屈曲加工して形成した外レール62が植立され、その外レール62の内側位置には外レール62と同様に帯状の金属板で形成した円弧状の内レール61が植立される。この内レール61と外レール62とにより遊技盤13の正面外周が囲まれ、遊技盤13とガラスユニット16(図1参照)とにより前後が囲まれることにより、遊技盤13の正面には、球の挙動により遊技が行われる遊技領域が形成される。遊技領域は、遊技盤13の正面であって2本のレール61,62とレール間を繋ぐ樹脂製の外縁部材73とにより区画して形成される領域(入賞口等が配設され、発射された球が流下する領域)である。   An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

2本のレール61,62は、球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)から発射された球を遊技盤13上部へ案内するために設けられたものである。内レール61の先端部分(図2の左上部)には戻り球防止部材68が取り付けられ、一旦、遊技盤13の上部へ案内された球が再度球案内通路内に戻ってしまうといった事態が防止される。外レール62の先端部(図2の右上部)には、球の最大飛翔部分に対応する位置に返しゴム69が取り付けられ、所定以上の勢いで発射された球は、返しゴム69に当たって、勢いが減衰されつつ中央部側へ跳ね返される。   The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

遊技領域の正面視左側下部(図2の左側下部)には、発光手段である複数のLED及び7セグメント表示器を備える第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bが配設されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、主制御装置110(図4参照)で行われる各制御に応じた表示がなされるものであり、主にパチンコ機10の遊技状態の表示が行われる。本実施形態では、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞したか、第2入賞口640へ入賞したかに応じて使い分けられるように構成されている。具体的には、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Aが作動し、一方で、球が、第2入賞口640へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Bが作動するように構成されている。   First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、LEDにより、パチンコ機10が確変中か時短中か通常中であるかを点灯状態により示したり、変動中であるか否かを点灯状態により示したり、停止図柄が確変大当たりに対応した図柄か普通大当たりに対応した図柄か外れ図柄であるかを点灯状態により示したり、保留球数を点灯状態により示すと共に、7セグメント表示装置により、大当たり中のラウンド数やエラー表示を行う。なお、複数のLEDは、それぞれのLEDの発光色(例えば、赤、緑、青)が異なるよう構成され、その発光色の組み合わせにより、少ないLEDでパチンコ機10の各種遊技状態を示唆することができる。   In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

尚、本パチンコ機10では、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640へ入賞があったことを契機として抽選が行われる。パチンコ機10は、その抽選において、大当たりか否かの当否判定(大当たり抽選)を行うと共に、大当たりと判定した場合はその大当たり種別の判定も行う。ここで判定される大当たり種別としては、15R確変大当たり、4R確変大当たり、15R通常大当たりが用意されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bには、変動終了後の停止図柄として抽選の結果が大当たりであるか否かが示されるだけでなく、大当たりである場合はその大当たり種別に応じた図柄が示される。   In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

ここで、「15R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことであり、「4R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が4ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことである。また、「15R通常大当たり」は、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に、低確率状態へ移行すると共に、所定の変動回数の間(例えば、100変動回数)は時短状態となる大当たりのことである。   Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

また、「高確率状態」とは、大当たり終了後に付加価値としてその後の大当たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確率変動中(確変中)の時をいい、換言すれば、特別遊技状態へ移行し易い遊技の状態のことである。本実施形態における高確率状態(確変中)は、後述する第2図柄の当たり確率がアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態を含む。「低確率状態」とは、確変中でない時をいい、大当たり確率が通常の状態、即ち、確変の時より大当たり確率が低い状態をいう。また、「低確率状態」のうちの時短状態(時短中)とは、大当たり確率が通常の状態であると共に、大当たり確率がそのままで第2図柄の当たり確率のみがアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態のことをいう。一方、パチンコ機10が通常中とは、確変中でも時短中でもない遊技の状態(大当たり確率も第2図柄の当たり確率もアップしていない状態)である。   In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

確変中や時短中は、第2図柄の当たり確率がアップするだけではなく、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間も変更され、通常中と比して長い時間が設定される。電動役物640aが開放された状態(開放状態)にある場合は、その電動役物640aが閉鎖された状態(閉鎖状態)にある場合と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態となる。よって、確変中や時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い状態となり、大当たり抽選が行われる回数を増やすことができる。   During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

なお、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aの開放時間を変更するのではなく、または、その開放時間を変更することに加えて、1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数を通常中よりも増やす変更を行うものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2図柄の当たり確率は変更せず、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間および1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数の少なくとも一方を変更するものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間や、1回の当たりで電動役物640aを開放する回数はせず、第2図柄の当たり確率だけを、通常中と比してアップするよう変更するものであってもよい。   In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

遊技領域には、球が入賞することにより5個から15個の球が賞球として払い出される複数の一般入賞口63が配設されている。また、遊技領域の中央部分には、可変表示装置ユニット80が配設されている。可変表示装置ユニット80には、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640への入賞(始動入賞)をトリガとして、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおける変動表示と同期させながら、第3図柄の変動表示を行う液晶ディスプレイ(以下単に「表示装置」と略す)で構成された第3図柄表示装置81と、スルーゲート67の球の通過をトリガとして第2図柄を変動表示するLEDで構成される第2図柄表示装置(図示せず)とが設けられている。また、可変表示装置ユニット80には、第3図柄表示装置81の外周を囲むようにして、センターフレーム86が配設されている。   The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

第3図柄表示装置81は9インチサイズの大型の液晶ディスプレイで構成されるものであり、表示制御装置114(図4参照)によって表示内容が制御されることにより、例えば上、中及び下の3つの図柄列が表示される。各図柄列は複数の図柄(第3図柄)によって構成され、これらの第3図柄が図柄列毎に横スクロールして第3図柄表示装置81の表示画面上にて第3図柄が可変表示されるようになっている。本実施形態の第3図柄表示装置81は、主制御装置110(図4参照)の制御に伴った遊技状態の表示が第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bで行われるのに対して、その第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bの表示に応じた装飾的な表示を行うものである。なお、表示装置に代えて、例えばリール等を用いて第3図柄表示装置81を構成するようにしても良い。   The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

第2図柄表示装置は、球がスルーゲート67を通過する毎に表示図柄(第2図柄(図示せず))としての「○」の図柄と「×」の図柄とを所定時間交互に点灯させる変動表示を行うものである。パチンコ機10では、球がスルーゲート67を通過したことが検出されると、当たり抽選が行われる。その当たり抽選の結果、当たりであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第2図柄の変動表示後に「○」の図柄が停止表示される。また、当たり抽選の結果、外れであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第3図柄の変動表示後に「×」の図柄が停止表示される。   Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

パチンコ機10は、第2図柄表示装置における変動表示が所定図柄(本実施形態においては「○」の図柄)で停止した場合に、第2入賞口640に付随された電動役物640aが所定時間だけ作動状態となる(開放される)よう構成されている。   In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間は、遊技状態が通常中の場合よりも、確変中または時短中の方が短くなるように設定される。これにより、確変中および時短中は、第2図柄の変動表示が短い時間で行われるので、当たり抽選を通常中よりも多く行うことができる。よって、当たり抽選において当たりとなる機会が増えるので、第2入賞口640の電動役物640aが開放状態となる機会を遊技者に多く与えることができる。よって、確変中および時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態とすることができる。   The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

なお、確変中または時短中において、当たり確率を高める、1回に当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を増やすなど、その他の方法によっても、確変中または時短中に第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態としている場合は、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を遊技状態にかかわらず一定としてもよい。一方、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を、確変中または時短中において通常中よりも短く設定する場合は、当たり確率を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよいし、また、1回の当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよい。   It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

スルーゲート67は、可変表示装置ユニット80の左右の領域において遊技盤13に組み付けられ、遊技盤13に発射された球の一部が通過可能に構成されている。スルーゲート67を球が通過すると、第2図柄の当たり抽選が行われる。当たり抽選の後、第2図柄表示装置にて変動表示を行い、当たり抽選の結果が当たりであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「○」の図柄を表示し、当たり抽選の結果が外れであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「×」の図柄を表示する。   The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

球のスルーゲート67の通過回数は、合計で最大4回まで保留され、その保留球数が上述した第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより表示されると共に第2図柄保留ランプ(図示せず)においても点灯表示される。第2図柄保留ランプは、最大保留数分の4つ設けられ、第3図柄表示装置81の下方に左右対称に配設されている。   The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

なお、第2図柄の変動表示は、本実施形態のように、第2図柄表示装置において複数のランプの点灯と非点灯を切り換えることにより行うものの他、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81の一部を使用して行うようにしても良い。同様に、第2図柄保留ランプの点灯を第3図柄表示装置81の一部で行うようにしても良い。また、スルーゲート67の球の通過に対する最大保留球数は4回に限定されるものでなく、3回以下、又は、5回以上の回数(例えば、8回)に設定しても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け数は2つに限定されるものではなく、例えば1つであっても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け位置は可変表示装置ユニット80の左右に限定されるものではなく、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の下方でも良い。また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより保留球数が示されるので、第2図柄保留ランプにより点灯表示を行わないものとしてもよい。   Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

可変表示装置ユニット80の下方には、球が入賞し得る第1入賞口64が配設されている。この第1入賞口64へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第1入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第1入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Aで示される。   Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

一方、第1入賞口64の正面視下方には、球が入賞し得る第2入賞口640が配設されている。この第2入賞口640へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第2入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第2入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Bで示される。   On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

また、第1入賞口64および第2入賞口640は、それぞれ、球が入賞すると5個の球が賞球として払い出される入賞口の1つにもなっている。なお、本実施形態においては、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを同じに構成したが、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを異なる数、例えば、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を3個とし、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を5個として構成してもよい。   Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

第2入賞口640には電動役物640aが付随されている。この電動役物640aは開閉可能に構成されており、通常は電動役物640aが閉鎖状態(縮小状態)となって、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しにくい状態となっている。一方、スルーゲート67への球の通過を契機として行われる第2図柄の変動表示の結果、「○」の図柄が第2図柄表示装置に表示された場合、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となり、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しやすい状態となる。   The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

上述した通り、確変中および時短中は、通常中と比して第2図柄の当たり確率が高く、また、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間も短いので、第2図柄の変動表示において「○」の図柄が表示され易くなって、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となる回数が増える。更に、確変中および時短中は、電動役物640aが開放される時間も、通常中より長くなる。よって、確変中および時短中は、通常時と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態を作ることができる。   As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

ここで、第1入賞口64に球が入賞した場合と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合とで、大当たりとなる確率は、低確率状態であっても高確率状態でも同一である。しかしながら、大当たりとなった場合に選定される大当たりの種別として15R確変大当たりとなる確率は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合のほうが第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合よりも高く設定されている。一方、第1入賞口64は、第2入賞口640にあるような電動役物は有しておらず、球が常時入賞可能な状態となっている。   Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

よって、通常中においては、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物が閉鎖状態にある場合が多く、第2入賞口640に入賞しづらいので、電動役物のない第1入賞口64へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「左打ち」)、第1入賞口64への入賞によって大当たり抽選の機会を多く得て、大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。   Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

一方、確変中や時短中は、スルーゲート67に球を通過させることで、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放状態となりやすく、第2入賞口640に入賞しやすい状態であるので、第2入賞口640へ向けて、可変表示装置80の右方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「右打ち」)、スルーゲート67を通過させて電動役物を開放状態にすると共に、第2入賞口640への入賞によって15R確変大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。   On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

なお、本実施形態におけるパチンコ機10は、遊技盤13の構成が左右対称とされるため、「右打ち」で第1入賞口64を狙うことも、「左打ち」で第2入賞口640を狙うこともできる。そのため、本実施形態のパチンコ機10は、パチンコ機10の遊技状態(確変中であるか、時短中であるか、通常中であるか)に応じて、遊技者に対し、球の発射の仕方を「左打ち」と「右打ち」とに変えさせることを不要にできる。よって、球の打ち方を変化させる煩わしさを解消することができる。   In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

第1入賞口64の下方には可変入賞装置330(図11参照)が配設されており、その略中央部分に特定入賞口65aが設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、第1入賞口64又は第2入賞口640への入賞に起因して行われた大当たり抽選が大当たりとなると、所定時間(変動時間)が経過した後に、大当たりの停止図柄となるよう第1図柄表示装置37A又は第1図柄表示装置37Bを点灯させると共に、その大当たりに対応した停止図柄を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させて、大当たりの発生が示される。その後、球が入賞し易い特別遊技状態(大当たり)に遊技状態が遷移する。この特別遊技状態として、通常時には閉鎖されている特定入賞口65aが、所定時間(例えば、30秒経過するまで、或いは、球が10個入賞するまで)開放される。   A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

この特定入賞口65aは、所定時間が経過すると閉鎖され、その閉鎖後、再度、その特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放される。この特定入賞口65aの開閉動作は、最高で例えば15回(15ラウンド)繰り返し可能にされている。この開閉動作が行われている状態が、遊技者にとって有利な特別遊技状態の一形態であり、遊技者には、遊技上の価値(遊技価値)の付与として通常時より多量の賞球の払い出しが行われる。   The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

なお、上記した形態に特別遊技状態は限定されるものではない。特定入賞口65aとは別に開閉される大開放口を遊技領域に設け、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおいて大当たりに対応したLEDが点灯した場合に、特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放され、その特定入賞口65aの開放中に、球が特定入賞口65a内へ入賞することを契機として特定入賞口65aとは別に設けられた大開放口が所定時間、所定回数開放される遊技状態を特別遊技状態として形成するようにしても良い。また、特定入賞口65aは1つに限るものではなく、1つ若しくは2以上の複数(例えば3つ)を配置しても良く、また配置位置も第1入賞口64の下方右側や、第1入賞口64の下方左側に限らず、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方でも良い。   Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

遊技盤13の下側における右隅部には、証紙や識別ラベル等を貼着するための貼着スペースK1が設けられ、貼着スペースK1に貼られた証紙等は、正面枠14の小窓35(図1参照)を通じて視認することができる。   A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

遊技盤13には、アウト口(図示せず)が設けられている。遊技領域を流下する球であって、いずれの入賞口63,64,65a,640にも入賞しなかった球は、アウト口を通って図示しない球排出路へと案内される。アウト口は、特定入賞口65aの左右に一対で配設される。   The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port. A pair of out ports are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

遊技盤13には、球の落下方向を適宜分散、調整等するために多数の釘が植設されているとともに、風車等の各種部材(役物)とが配設されている。   A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

図3に示すように、パチンコ機10の背面側には、制御基板ユニット90,91と、裏パックユニット94とが主に備えられている。制御基板ユニット90は、主基板(主制御装置110)と音声ランプ制御基板(音声ランプ制御装置113)と表示制御基板(表示制御装置114)とが搭載されてユニット化されている。制御基板ユニット91は、払出制御基板(払出制御装置111)と発射制御基板(発射制御装置112)と電源基板(電源装置115)とカードユニット接続基板116とが搭載されてユニット化されている。   As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

裏パックユニット94は、保護カバー部を形成する裏パック92と払出ユニット93とがユニット化されている。また、各制御基板には、各制御を司る1チップマイコンとしてのMPU、各種機器との連絡をとるポート、各種抽選の際に用いられる乱数発生器、時間計数や同期を図る場合などに使用されるクロックパルス発生回路等が、必要に応じて搭載されている。   The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

なお、主制御装置110、音声ランプ制御装置113及び表示制御装置114、払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112、電源装置115、カードユニット接続基板116は、それぞれ基板ボックス100〜104に収納されている。基板ボックス100〜104は、ボックスベースと該ボックスベースの開口部を覆うボックスカバーとを備えており、そのボックスベースとボックスカバーとが互いに連結されて、各制御装置や各基板が収納される。   The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

また、基板ボックス100(主制御装置110)及び基板ボックス102(払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112)は、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとを封印ユニット(図示せず)によって開封不能に連結(かしめ構造による連結)している。また、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとの連結部には、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとに亘って封印シール(図示せず)が貼着されている。この封印シールは、脆性な素材で構成されており、基板ボックス100,102を開封するために封印シールを剥がそうとしたり、基板ボックス100,102を無理に開封しようとすると、ボックスベース側とボックスカバー側とに切断される。よって、封印ユニット又は封印シールを確認することで、基板ボックス100,102が開封されたかどうかを知ることができる。   Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

払出ユニット93は、裏パックユニット94の最上部に位置して上方に開口したタンク130と、タンク130の下方に連結され下流側に向けて緩やかに傾斜するタンクレール131と、タンクレール131の下流側に縦向きに連結されるケースレール132と、ケースレール132の最下流部に設けられ、払出モータ216(図4参照)の所定の電気的構成により球の払出を行う払出装置133とを備えている。タンク130には、遊技ホールの島設備から供給される球が逐次補給され、払出装置133により必要個数の球の払い出しが適宜行われる。タンクレール131には、当該タンクレール131に振動を付加するためのバイブレータ134が取り付けられている。   The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

また、払出制御装置111には状態復帰スイッチ120が設けられ、発射制御装置112には可変抵抗器の操作つまみ121が設けられ、電源装置115にはRAM消去スイッチ122が設けられている。状態復帰スイッチ120は、例えば、払出モータ216(図4参照)部の球詰まり等、払出エラーの発生時に球詰まりを解消(正常状態への復帰)するために操作される。操作つまみ121は、発射ソレノイドの発射力を調整するために操作される。RAM消去スイッチ122は、パチンコ機10を初期状態に戻したい場合に電源投入時に操作される。   The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

次に、図4を参照して、本パチンコ機10の電気的構成について説明する。図4は、パチンコ機10の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。   Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

主制御装置110には、演算装置である1チップマイコンとしてのMPU201が搭載されている。MPU201には、該MPU201により実行される各種の制御プログラムや固定値データを記憶したROM202と、そのROM202内に記憶される制御プログラムの実行に際して各種のデータ等を一時的に記憶するためのメモリであるRAM203と、そのほか、割込回路やタイマ回路、データ送受信回路などの各種回路が内蔵されている。主制御装置110では、MPU201によって、大当たり抽選や第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81における表示の設定、第2図柄表示装置における表示結果の抽選といったパチンコ機10の主要な処理を実行する。   The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

なお、払出制御装置111や音声ランプ制御装置113などのサブ制御装置に対して動作を指示するために、主制御装置110から該サブ制御装置へ各種のコマンドがデータ送受信回路によって送信されるが、かかるコマンドは、主制御装置110からサブ制御装置へ一方向にのみ送信される。   Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

RAM203は、各種エリア、カウンタ、フラグのほか、MPU201の内部レジスタの内容やMPU201により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。なお、RAM203は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM203に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。   The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

停電などの発生により電源が遮断されると、その電源遮断時(停電発生時を含む。以下同様)のスタックポインタや、各レジスタの値がRAM203に記憶される。一方、電源投入時(停電解消による電源投入を含む。以下同様)には、RAM203に記憶される情報に基づいて、パチンコ機10の状態が電源遮断前の状態に復帰される。RAM203への書き込みはメイン処理(図示せず)によって電源遮断時に実行され、RAM203に書き込まれた各値の復帰は電源投入時の立ち上げ処理(図示せず)において実行される。なお、MPU201のNMI端子(ノンマスカブル割込端子)には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監視回路252からの停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU201へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。   When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

主制御装置110のMPU201には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン204を介して入出力ポート205が接続されている。入出力ポート205には、払出制御装置111、音声ランプ制御装置113、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B、第2図柄表示装置、第2図柄保留ランプ、特定入賞口65aの開閉板の下辺を軸として正面側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイドや電動役物を駆動するためのソレノイドなどからなるソレノイド209が接続され、MPU201は、入出力ポート205を介してこれらに対し各種コマンドや制御信号を送信する。   An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

また、入出力ポート205には、図示しないスイッチ群およびスライド位置検出センサSや回転位置検出センサRを含むセンサ群などからなる各種スイッチ208、電源装置115に設けられた後述のRAM消去スイッチ回路253が接続され、MPU201は各種スイッチ208から出力される信号や、RAM消去スイッチ回路253より出力されるRAM消去信号SG2に基づいて各種処理を実行する。   The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

払出制御装置111は、払出モータ216を駆動させて賞球や貸出球の払出制御を行うものである。演算装置であるMPU211は、そのMPU211により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM212と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM213とを有している。   The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

払出制御装置111のRAM213は、主制御装置110のRAM203と同様に、MPU211の内部レジスタの内容やMPU211により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。RAM213は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM213に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。なお、主制御装置110のMPU201と同様、MPU211のNMI端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監視回路252から停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU211へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。   The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

払出制御装置111のMPU211には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン214を介して入出力ポート215が接続されている。入出力ポート215には、主制御装置110や払出モータ216、発射制御装置112などがそれぞれ接続されている。また、図示はしないが、払出制御装置111には、払い出された賞球を検出するための賞球検出スイッチが接続されている。なお、該賞球検出スイッチは、払出制御装置111に接続されるが、主制御装置110には接続されていない。   An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

発射制御装置112は、主制御装置110により球の発射の指示がなされた場合に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量に応じた球の打ち出し強さとなるよう球発射ユニット112aを制御するものである。球発射ユニット112aは、図示しない発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石を備えており、その発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石は、所定条件が整っている場合に駆動が許可される。具体的には、遊技者が操作ハンドル51に触れていることをタッチセンサ51aにより検出し、球の発射を停止させるための発射停止スイッチ51bがオフ(操作されていないこと)を条件に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)に対応して発射ソレノイドが励磁され、操作ハンドル51の操作量に応じた強さで球が発射される。   The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、音声出力装置(図示しないスピーカなど)226における音声の出力、ランプ表示装置(電飾部29〜33、表示ランプ34など)227における点灯および消灯の出力、変動演出(変動表示)や予告演出といった表示制御装置114で行われる第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様の設定などを制御するものである。演算装置であるMPU221は、そのMPU221により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM222と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM223とを有している。   The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

音声ランプ制御装置113のMPU221には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン224を介して入出力ポート225が接続されている。入出力ポート225には、主制御装置110、表示制御装置114、音声出力装置226、ランプ表示装置227、その他装置228、枠ボタン22などがそれぞれ接続されている。その他装置228には駆動モータ335a,337a及び振動装置366が含まれる。   An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335 a and 337 a and a vibration device 366.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、主制御装置110から受信した各種のコマンド(変動パターンコマンド、停止種別コマンド等)に基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様を決定し、決定した表示態様をコマンド(表示用変動パターンコマンド、表示用停止種別コマンド等)によって表示制御装置114へ通知する。また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、枠ボタン22からの入力を監視し、遊技者によって枠ボタン22が操作された場合は、第3図柄表示装置81で表示されるステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチ時の演出内容を変更したりするように、表示制御装置114へ指示する。ステージが変更される場合は、変更後のステージに応じた背面画像を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させるべく、変更後のステージに関する情報を含めた背面画像変更コマンドを表示制御装置114へ送信する。ここで、背面画像とは、第3図柄表示装置81に表示させる主要な画像である第3図柄の背面側に表示される画像のことである。表示制御装置114は、この音声ランプ制御装置113から送信されるコマンドに従って、第3図柄表示装置81に各種の画像を表示する。   The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、表示制御装置114から第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を表すコマンド(表示コマンド)を受信する。音声ランプ制御装置113では、表示制御装置114から受信した表示コマンドに基づき、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容に合わせて、その表示内容に対応する音声を音声出力装置226から出力し、また、その表示内容に対応させてランプ表示装置227の点灯および消灯を制御する。   Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

表示制御装置114は、音声ランプ制御装置113及び第3図柄表示装置81が接続され、音声ランプ制御装置113より受信したコマンドに基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81における第3図柄の変動演出などの表示を制御するものである。また、表示制御装置114は、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を通知する表示コマンドを適宜音声ランプ制御装置113へ送信する。音声ランプ制御装置113は、この表示コマンドによって示される表示内容にあわせて音声出力装置226から音声を出力することで、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と音声出力装置226からの音声出力とをあわせることができる。   The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

電源装置115は、パチンコ機10の各部に電源を供給するための電源部251と、停電等による電源遮断を監視する停電監視回路252と、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が設けられたRAM消去スイッチ回路253とを有している。電源部251は、図示しない電源経路を通じて、各制御装置110〜114等に対して各々に必要な動作電圧を供給する装置である。その概要としては、電源部251は、外部より供給される交流24ボルトの電圧を取り込み、各種スイッチ208などの各種スイッチや、ソレノイド209などのソレノイド、モータ等を駆動するための12ボルトの電圧、ロジック用の5ボルトの電圧、RAMバックアップ用のバックアップ電圧などを生成し、これら12ボルトの電圧、5ボルトの電圧及びバックアップ電圧を各制御装置110〜114等に対して必要な電圧を供給する。   The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

停電監視回路252は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、主制御装置110のMPU201及び払出制御装置111のMPU211の各NMI端子へ停電信号SG1を出力するための回路である。停電監視回路252は、電源部251から出力される最大電圧である直流安定24ボルトの電圧を監視し、この電圧が22ボルト未満になった場合に停電(電源断、電源遮断)の発生と判断して、停電信号SG1を主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111へ出力する。停電信号SG1の出力によって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、停電の発生を認識し、NMI割込処理を実行する。なお、電源部251は、直流安定24ボルトの電圧が22ボルト未満になった後においても、NMI割込処理の実行に充分な時間の間、制御系の駆動電圧である5ボルトの電圧の出力を正常値に維持するように構成されている。よって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、NMI割込処理(図示せず)を正常に実行し完了することができる。   The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

RAM消去スイッチ回路253は、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が押下された場合に、主制御装置110へ、バックアップデータをクリアさせるためのRAM消去信号SG2を出力するための回路である。主制御装置110は、パチンコ機10の電源投入時に、RAM消去信号SG2を入力した場合に、バックアップデータをクリアすると共に、払出制御装置111においてバックアップデータをクリアさせるための払出初期化コマンドを払出制御装置111に対して送信する。   The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

図5は、第1実施形態における操作デバイス300の正面斜視図である。図5に示すように、操作デバイス300は、正面視における内枠12の左右方向中央部(即ち、パチンコ機10の左右方向中央部)に配置される。   FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

操作デバイス300は、遊技者が把持操作可能な首振り操作部材310を備え、その首振り操作部材310は、上皿17の外枠に沿って前後方向に凹設される収容凹部17a及び下皿ユニット15の左右方向中央部で上下方向に凹設される収容凹部15aによって構成される領域を移動可能とされる。   The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by a player. The swing operation member 310 includes an accommodation recess 17 a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The region formed by the housing recess 15a that is recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the left-right direction of the unit 15 can be moved.

首振り操作部材310と収容凹部15a,17aとの間には、少なくとも手の指が無理なく入る程度の隙間が空けられる。これにより、遊技者は、首振り操作部材310を上から握りこむ態様で把持することができる。首振り操作部材310を上から握りこむ態様で把持した場合、首振り操作部材310と収容凹部17aとの間に入れた指が首振り操作部材310の背面側の側面に引っ掛かり、その状態で手の力を抜いて重力に任せても、手が首振り操作部材310から滑り落ちることが防止される。従って、遊技者が首振り操作デバイス310の上に手を維持する負担を軽減することができる。   There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recesses 15a and 17a so that at least a finger of a hand can easily enter. Thereby, the player can hold the swinging operation member 310 in such a manner as to hold it from above. When the swinging operation member 310 is gripped from above, a finger placed between the swinging operation member 310 and the housing recess 17a is caught on the side surface on the back side of the swinging operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if this force is removed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from sliding off the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the player maintaining his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

なお、遊技者は右手で操作ハンドル51を握るため、首振り操作部材310の操作は左手で行われることが多くなる。そのため、以下の説明では、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を左手で操作するという前提で、説明を行う。   Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it demonstrates on the assumption that a player operates the swing operation member 310 with a left hand.

図6(a)は、パチンコ機10の部分正面図であり、図6(b)は、図6(a)のVIb−VIb線におけるパチンコ機10の部分断面図であり、図7(a)は、パチンコ機10の部分正面図であり、図7(b)は、図7(a)のVIIb−VIIb線におけるパチンコ機10の部分断面図である。   6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a). These are the partial front views of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a).

図6及び図7では、パチンコ機10の、操作デバイス300付近が部分的に図示される。なお、図6では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置(本実施形態における初期位置)に配置された状態が図示され、図7では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置(本実施形態における押し下げ位置)に配置された状態が図示され、首振り操作部材310を把持する手が想像線で図示される。   6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and in FIG. 7, the swing operation member 310 is in the downward position (the depressed position in the present embodiment). ) Is illustrated, and a hand holding the swing operation member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

下皿ユニット15の収容凹部15a及び上皿17の収容凹部17aは、首振り操作部材310の外形から十分に離間して配置される。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持し、押し下げ操作する際に、首振り操作部材310と収容凹部15a及び収容凹部17aとの間に指を挟むことを抑制することができる。   The housing recess 15 a of the lower dish unit 15 and the housing recess 17 a of the upper dish 17 are arranged sufficiently apart from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when a player holds the swing operation member 310 and performs a push-down operation, it is possible to prevent the finger from being pinched between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recess 15a and the housing recess 17a.

図6及び図7に示すように、遊技者は中間枠部材312に指をかけて首振り操作部材310を把持する。この状態で、押しボタン部分を兼ねるレンズ部材317が掌と対面配置されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したまま握り込むことで、振動部材310を押し込む操作を行うことができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を把持した状態で指で押しボタンを押したり、首振り操作部材310を持ち替えたりせず、首振り操作部材310を把持した状態でレンズ部材317を押し込み操作することができる。従って、操作を簡単化することができる。   As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his / her finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and holds the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as a push button portion is disposed facing the palm, so that the player can perform an operation of pushing the vibration member 310 by grasping the swing operation member 310 while grasping it. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or holding the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

首振り操作部材310に配置されるレンズ部材317が、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した際に掌に当たる位置に配設される。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持していることを検出した上でレンズ部材317を振動させることで、遊技者(の掌や指など)に振動を伝えることができ、振動が遊技者に気づかれないという事態を防ぐことができる。従って、操作デバイス300の演出効果を向上させることができる。   The lens member 317 disposed on the swing operation member 310 is disposed at a position where it hits the palm when the player holds the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, vibration can be transmitted to the player (such as his palm or finger). It is possible to prevent a situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

また、その振動に合わせてレンズ部材317を押し込み操作することで、入力操作をするタイミングを図ることができるように演出を行うことができ、入力操作のタイミングを図ることに集中しすぎて遊技に集中できないという問題点を解消することができる。   Further, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to produce an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be achieved, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of being unable to concentrate can be solved.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した状態で、レンズ部材317は遊技者の手の内側に隠されるので、レンズ部材317が振動しているかどうか(レンズ部材317が中間枠部材312に対して移動しているかどうか)を、首振り操作部材310を把持している遊技者以外の他の遊技者は把握しづらくなる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を握っている遊技者だけに対して大当たりの告知をすることができ、遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。   Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand in a state where the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). It is difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to know whether or not it is moving. Therefore, it is possible to give a jackpot notification only to the player holding the swing operation member 310, and to improve the interest of the player.

図6及び図7に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される状態と、下向き位置に配置される状態とでは、首振り操作部材310の前後位置および上下位置が異なる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を操作する際に、遊技者は手の位置を上下方向や前後方向に移動させることになるので、遊技者が操作している実感を得ることができる。   As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front / rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. Thereby, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, so that it is possible to obtain a feeling that the player is operating.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する際に、遊技者の指は中間枠部材312に振れ、遊技者の指先が背面側枠部材311に引っかかる。背面側枠部材311が背面側に曲率半径の中心を有する円弧を描く態様で反り返ることで、容易に指先を背面側枠部材311に引っ掛けることができるので、図7(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置される場合のように手首が固まる姿勢でも、指先が背面側枠部材311から外れることを抑制することができる。   When the player holds the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings to the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught by the back side frame member 311. Since the back side frame member 311 is warped in a manner of drawing an arc having a center of curvature radius on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311, as shown in FIG. Even in a posture in which the wrist is hardened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, the fingertip can be prevented from coming off the back side frame member 311.

また、指先が背面側枠部材311に引っかかることで、掌の内側に振動装置366(図11参照)の振動を閉じ込めることができ、遊技者が感じる振動を大きく確保することができる。   Further, since the fingertip is caught by the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely ensured.

図7に示すように、図6に示す状態から首振り操作部材310を押し下げると、首振り操作部材310が遊技者の手前下方に移動することにより自然と手首が返る。そのため、首振り操作部材310を奥に押し込む操作(図22(b)参照)を、手首の返しを解除する態様で手首を伸ばすことで行うことができる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を操作する遊技者の負担を軽減することができる。   As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the wrist naturally returns as the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player. Therefore, the operation (see FIG. 22B) for pushing the swing operation member 310 to the back can be performed by extending the wrist in such a manner as to release the turning of the wrist. Thereby, the burden of the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

図6に示すように、首振り操作部材310の下端部から首振り操作部材310の回転軸である軸支棒363までの腕長さR1に比較して、首振り操作部材310の上端部から首振り操作部材310の回転軸である軸支棒363までの腕長さR2が長尺とされる。これにより、首振り操作部材310の上部を把持して首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363中心で回転させる場合に容易に(軽い力で)回転させることができる。一方で、首振り操作部材310の下端部に手をかけて、首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363中心で回転させる(誤操作する)場合には大きな力を必要とすることができる。従って、首振り操作部材310の上部を把持して首振り操作部材310を回転させる際の遊技者の負担を軽減できると共に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310の下端部に手をかけて、首振り操作部材310を回転させる誤操作を抑止することができる。   As shown in FIG. 6, compared to the arm length R1 from the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation shaft of the swing operation member 310, the upper end portion of the swing operation member 310 The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation shaft of the swing operation member 310 is long. Thus, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated about the pivotal support rod 363, the swing operation member 310 can be easily rotated (by a light force). On the other hand, a large force can be required when the user swings the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 and rotates the swing operation member 310 about the pivot bar 363 (incorrect operation). Therefore, the burden on the player when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated can be reduced, and the player places a hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 and An erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310 can be suppressed.

図8は、操作デバイス300の正面斜視図である。なお、図8では、操作デバイス300の首振り操作部材310が、下向き位置(図7参照)に配置された状態が図示される。図8に示すように、操作デバイス300は、矩形状の外側ケース部材320から、首振り操作部材310が正面側に張り出して配置される。   FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is disposed in the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is arranged such that a swing operation member 310 projects from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

図9は、操作デバイス300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図9では、外側ケース部材320が、その外側ケース部材320よりも内側に配設される内側ケース部材330から取り外された状態が図示される。   FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 9 illustrates a state where the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed on the inner side of the outer case member 320.

図9に示すように、外側ケース部材320は、カバー部材344,345(図11参照)の曲面に沿った形状で背面側が形成され内側ケース部材330に正面側からカバー部材344,345の左右の縁を隠す態様で取り付けられる前カバー321と、その前カバー321の上端から後方に凸設される凸設部321aに上側から嵌め込まれる長尺板形状の上カバー322と、前カバー321及び上カバー322の左右方向にフランジ状に延設されるフランジ部321b,322aを内嵌する態様で内ケース部材330に左右方向から締結固定される左カバー部材323,右カバー部材324と、内ケース部材330の内部に張り出して配設される複数のセンサ部材325aを有するセンサ基盤325と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the back side is formed. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from the upper side to a protruding portion 321a protruding rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, the front cover 321 and the upper cover The left cover member 323, the right cover member 324, and the inner case member 330 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which flange portions 321b and 322a extending in a flange shape in the left and right direction of the 322 are fitted. And a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a disposed so as to project inside.

左カバー部材323及び右カバー部材324を締結固定する一方で、前カバー321及び上カバー322を嵌め込みで固定することで、正面視において締結ビスが視認されることを防止することができる。従って、操作デバイス300を分解するいたずらを防止することができる。   While the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 are fastened and fixed, by fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being seen in front view. Therefore, mischief of disassembling the operation device 300 can be prevented.

センサ部材325aは、第1センサ挿通孔332e2に挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第1センサ部材325a1と、第2センサ挿通孔332e3に挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第2センサ部材325a2と、その第2センサ部材325a2の下方に配置されセンサ挿通孔332fに挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第3センサ部材325a3と、を主に備える。   The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2. A photocoupler-type third sensor member 325a3 that is disposed below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

なお、第1センサ部材325a1及び第2センサ部材325a2は、レバー部材340の姿勢を検出するセンサであり、第3センサ部材325a3は、偏心カム部材333の位相を検出するセンサである。   The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

また、フォトカプラ形式のセンサとは、光を投光する投光部と、この投光部からの光を受光する受光部とを備え、検出する部分を挿入可能な隙間(スリット)を備えて略コ字状に配置されるセンサを意味する。   In addition, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and includes a gap (slit) into which a portion to be detected can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

図10は、操作デバイス300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図10では、外側ケース部材320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材330が分解された状態が図示される。   FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the outer case member 320 is not shown and the inner case member 330 is disassembled.

図10に示すように、内側ケース部材330は、レバー部材340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材331及び右カバー部材332と、左カバー部材331から凸設される偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材333と、その偏心カム部材333との相対的な位相が不変とされ偏心カム部材333と同様に偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される位相検出部材334と、左カバー部材331に外側から締結固定され偏心カム部材333を回転させる駆動力を発生させる第1駆動装置335と、左カバー部材331から凸設されるロック軸331d3に軸支されるロック部材336と、右カバー部材332に外側から締結固定されロック部材336を回転させる駆動力を発生させる第2駆動装置337と、レバー部材340を軸支するレバー支持軸331d1の後方に配設されるギアダンパ338と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 340 is disposed inside, and an eccentric cam that protrudes from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2, and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, with the relative phase of the eccentric cam member 333 being unchanged. A first driving device 335 that generates a driving force that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside and rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that protrudes from the left cover member 331. A second driving device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside and generates a driving force for rotating the lock member 336, and a lever member A gear damper 338 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 for supporting the 40, mainly comprises.

左カバー部材331は、右方に開口が形成される有底筒状の部材であって、その底部(図10左側部分)において矩形板状に形成される下側側壁部331aと、その下側側壁部331aの上側に正面視左方(図10奥側)にオフセットされる矩形板状の上側側壁部331bと、下側側壁部331a及び上側側壁部331bの縁から右方に延設され手前側上部を除いて右カバー部材332と当接される板状の連結側壁部331cと、下側側壁部331a又は上側側壁部331bから右方に凸設され円柱形状に形成される複数の棒状部材331dと、上側側壁部331bに穿設される複数の挿通孔331eと、ロック部材336の姿勢を検出するフォトカプラ形式のセンサ部材331fと、上側側壁部331bの左方に張り出され棒状部材331dの内の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1を内嵌支持する有底筒状の軸支部331gと、を主に備える。   The left cover member 331 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening on the right side, and a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left side portion in FIG. 10), and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b that is offset to the left (front side in FIG. 10) in front view on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extends to the right from the edges of the lower and upper side wall portions 331a and 331b. A plate-like connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-like members that are protruded rightward from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and formed in a columnar shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the attitude of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331 that projects to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Comprising a shaft support 331g lever support shaft 331d1 which is placed on top inner fitting support to bottomed cylindrical among, mainly.

右カバー部材332は、左方に開口が形成される有底筒状の部材であって、その底部(図10右側部分)において矩形板状に形成される下側側壁部332aと、その下側側壁部332aの上側に正面視右方(図10手前側)にオフセットされる板状の上側側壁部332bと、下側側壁部332a及び上側側壁部332bの縁から左方に延設され手前側上部を除いて左カバー部材331と当接される板状の連結側壁部332cと、下側側壁部332aに一対の円形状が組み合わされた態様で穿設され第2駆動装置337のギア部分が挿通される駆動部材挿通孔332dと、上側側壁部332bに穿設される複数の挿通孔332eと、第3センサ部材325a3が挿通されるセンサ挿通孔332fと、上側側壁部332bの右方に張り出され棒状部材331dの内の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1を内嵌支持する有底筒状の軸支部332gと、上側側壁部332bの内面側に環状に凸設される環状凸部332iと、を主に備える。   The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening on the left side, and a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (right side portion in FIG. 10), and a lower side thereof A plate-like upper side wall portion 332b that is offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and the front side extended from the edges of the lower side wall portion 332a and the upper side wall portion 332b to the left. Except for the upper part, a plate-like connecting side wall portion 332c that comes into contact with the left cover member 331 and a lower side wall portion 332a are drilled in a form in which a pair of circular shapes are combined. A drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, a plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, a sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and a right side of the upper side wall portion 332b are stretched. Stick out A bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 332g that fits and supports a lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the top of the material 331d, an annular convex portion 332i that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b, Is mainly provided.

上側側壁部331b,332bは、手前側上部が左右方向視で軸支部331g,332gを中心とした1/4円形状に形成され(図17(b)参照)、連結側壁部331c,332cは、手前側上部に左右方向に切りかかれる切り欠き331c1,332c1を備える。   The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a quarter circle shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when viewed from the left and right as viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper side on the front side.

切り欠き331c1,332c1は、レバー部材340が通される部分であって、レバー部材340の横ずれ(揺動軸であるレバー支持軸331d1の延設方向の位置ずれ)を防止する役割を有する。また、上側側壁部331b,332bの1/4円形状を利用して、前カバー321(図9参照)が内側ケース部材330に正面側から取り付けられる。   The notches 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement in the extending direction of the lever support shaft 331d1, which is a swing shaft). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the ¼ circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

棒状部材331dは、本実施形態では4本の円柱部材から形成される。即ち、棒状部材331dは、左カバー部材331の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1と、そのレバー支持軸331d1の下方に配設される偏心カム軸331d2と、下側側壁部331aの右方から凸設されるロック軸331d3と、そのロック軸331d3の下方に併設される補助軸331d4と、を主に備える。   The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four columnar members in the present embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d is a lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. Are mainly provided with a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

レバー支持軸331d1は、レバー部材340が揺動可能に軸支される部材であって、軸支部331g,332gに挿通されることで両端支持される。   The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member that is pivotally supported by the lever member 340, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

偏心カム軸331d2は、偏心カム部材333及び位相検出部材334が位相合わせされた状態で挿通される部材である。   The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member that is inserted in a state where the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are phase-matched.

ロック軸331d3及び補助軸331d4は、共にロック部材336が挿通される軸であって、ロック軸331d3はロック部材336の軸支孔336bが軸支される部材であって、補助軸331d4は、ロック部材336の案内孔336cを案内する部材である。   Both the lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted. The lock shaft 331d3 is a member through which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is a lock shaft. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

挿通孔331eは、本実施形態では、3箇所の貫通孔から構成される。即ち、レバー支持軸331d1の手前側に配置されると共にレバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿った長孔状の案内支持孔331e1と、レバー支持軸331d1の背面側に配置される円形状の貫通孔であってギアダンパ338が挿通されるギアダンパ挿通孔331e2と、ギアダンパ挿通孔331e2の背面側下方に配置され一対の円形状が組み合わされた態様で穿設される駆動部材挿通孔331e3と、を主に備える。   In this embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 331e1 having a long hole shape along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and the circular shape disposed on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1 is disposed on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. A gear damper insertion hole 331e2 through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and a drive member insertion hole 331e3 which is disposed below the back side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is drilled in a combination of a pair of circular shapes. Prepare mainly.

案内支持孔331e1は、角度規制棒部材346が挿通されレバー部材340の揺動を案内すると共に、レバー部材340の揺動の終端を端部で規定する。   The guide support hole 331e1 guides the swing of the lever member 340 through which the angle regulating bar member 346 is inserted, and defines the end of the swing of the lever member 340 at the end.

センサ部材331fは、ロック部材336の検出片336eがセンサ部材331fの隙間を通過することを検出して、ロック部材336の姿勢を検出する。   The sensor member 331f detects the posture of the lock member 336 by detecting that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f.

駆動部材挿通孔332dは、大型の円と小型の円とが連結される形状とされるので、それぞれの円の形状を調整しておくことで、第2駆動装置337の駆動ギア337bを、大型の円を通して右カバー部材332の左方に張り出させ、その状態で駆動ギア337bを軸支する部分の台座部分を小型の円に嵌め込むことができる。   Since the driving member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected to each other, the driving gear 337b of the second driving device 337 can be moved to a large size by adjusting the shape of each circle. The base portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle.

これにより、第2駆動装置337に駆動ギア337bを軸支したまま内カバー部材332に挿通すること(駆動ギア337bの外径以上の径の孔が必要)と、挿通した第2駆動装置337の軸位置を固定すること(駆動ギア337bの駆動軸の台座と同程度の径の孔で固定)とを両立させることができる。   Accordingly, the second drive device 337 is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the second drive device 337 inserted is inserted. Fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having a diameter similar to that of the base of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b) can be achieved.

挿通孔332eは、本実施形態では、3箇所の貫通孔から構成される。即ち、案内支持孔331e1と左右方向で合致する位置および形状で形成されレバー部材340の角度規制棒部材346が案内される案内支持孔332e1と、軸支部332gの背面側に配設される長方形状の貫通孔であって第1センサ部材325a1が挿通される第1センサ挿通孔332e2と、その第1センサ挿通孔332e2が軸支部332gを中心として回転した位置に配置される長方形状の貫通孔であって第2センサ部材325a2が挿通される第2センサ挿通孔332e3と、を主に備える。   In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction, and the rectangular shape is disposed on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. A first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and a rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is disposed at a position rotated about the shaft support portion 332g. The second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted is mainly provided.

センサ挿通孔332e2,332e3は、レバー部材340のセンサ検出片343bが隙間を通過することを検出してレバー部材340の姿勢を検出するセンサ部材325a1,325a2を挿通する貫通孔である。   The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap.

軸支部331g,332gにねじりバネSP1が巻き付けられる。また、軸支部331g,332gの前下方に板状のねじりバネ係止部331h,332hが配置され、左カバー部材331及び右カバー部材332の左右方向外側に延設される。   A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-like torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are disposed in front of and below the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332, respectively.

本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP1の一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332hに上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に下側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材340は首振り操作部材310が起き上がる方向に付勢される。   In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is brought into contact with the torsion spring engaging portions 331h and 332h from the upper side, and the other end is brought into contact with the angle regulating bar member 346 from the lower side. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 rises.

環状凸部332iは、位相検出部材334が外嵌される部分である。環状凸部332iに位相検出部材334が外嵌されることにより、偏心カム軸331d2の軸合わせを強固に行うことができる。   The annular convex portion 332 i is a portion on which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

第1駆動装置335は、駆動力を発生させる駆動モータ335aと、その駆動モータ335aに軸支され回転駆動される駆動ギア335bと、を主に備える。駆動ギア335bは偏心カム部材333の本体部333aと歯合され、駆動力が伝達される。   The first driving device 335 mainly includes a driving motor 335a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the driving motor 335a. The drive gear 335b meshes with the main body 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the drive force is transmitted.

ロック部材336は、レバー部材340の揺動を防止する部材であって、先端側が略L字の鉤状に形成される本体部336aと、その本体部336aの基端側に穿設される軸支孔336bと、その軸支孔336bを中心とした円弧に沿って形成される案内孔336cと、本体部336aの基端側から軸支孔336bの軸径方向外側へ向かってギア状に凸設されるギア部336dと、軸支孔336bの軸径方向外側に延設されると共にセンサ部材331fの隙間を通過可能とされる板状の検出片336eと、を主に備える。   The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and a main body portion 336a that is formed in a substantially L-shaped bowl shape on the distal end side, and a shaft that is drilled on the proximal end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centering on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-shaped convex from the base end side of the main body 336a toward the outside in the axial radial direction of the shaft support hole 336b. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d provided and a plate-like detection piece 336e that extends outward in the axial diameter direction of the shaft support hole 336b and that can pass through the gap of the sensor member 331f.

案内孔336cは、補助軸331d4が挿通される長孔であり、この案内孔336cの長さにより、ロック部材336の揺動終端を規定することができる。   The guide hole 336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the swing end of the lock member 336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 336c.

第2駆動装置337は、駆動力を発生させる駆動モータ337aと、その駆動モータ337aに軸支され回転駆動される駆動ギア337bと、を主に備える。駆動ギア337bはロック部材336のギア部336dと歯合され、駆動力が伝達される。   The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a drive force, and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a. The drive gear 337b is engaged with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the drive force is transmitted.

ギアダンパ338は、歯合回転する部材に粘性抵抗を与える部材であって、ギアダンパ挿通孔331e2を通して左カバー部材331の右方(内側ケース部材330内方)にギア部材が張り出されると共に、そのギア部材はギア部342b(図11参照)に歯合される。そのため、レバー部材340は、揺動する間、ギアダンパ338から粘性抵抗を受ける。   The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to the member that rotates in mesh, and the gear member projects to the right of the left cover member 331 (inside the inner case member 330) through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

図11は、首振り操作部材310及びレバー部材340の分解正面斜視図である。図11では、首振り操作部材310から背面側枠部材311が分解された状態が図示されると共に、レバー部材340の左右に締結固定されるギアダンパ受け部材342、姿勢検出部材343及び破壊防止を目的として配設される剥離部材350が分解された状態が図示される。   FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. FIG. 11 shows a state in which the rear side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310, and the gear damper receiving member 342 fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340, the posture detecting member 343, and the purpose of preventing destruction. A state in which the peeling member 350 disposed as is disassembled is illustrated.

背面側枠部材311は、外殻が背面側に突出する半球形状に形成され、その突出された先から上部が正面側に張り出す(戻る)態様で略半円状に凹む(図17(b)参照)。その凹む部分に略矩形状の開口である挿通孔311aを備える。挿通孔311aは、首振り部材360が部分的に挿通される貫通孔である。   The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the outer shell protruding to the back side, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip (FIG. 17B )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

図11に示すように、レバー部材340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材341と、その本体部材341の左側側面に締結固定され軸方向視の外形が略円形状に形成されるギアダンパ受け部材342と、そのギアダンパ受け部材342と同軸で軸支され軸方向視の外形が略円形状に形成されると共に本体部材341の右側側面に締結固定される姿勢検出部材343と、それらギアダンパ受け部材342及び姿勢検出部材343の円形部分に上側から外嵌する形状に形成される上部カバー部材344と、本体部材341を挟んで上部カバー部材344と対向配置される下部カバー部材345と、ギアダンパ受け部材342の筒状部342a及び姿勢検出部材343の筒状部343aに挿通される角度規制棒部材346と、本体部材341の軸孔341bと同軸で軸支される剥離部材350と、本体部材341の正面側端部に配設される首振り部材360と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is formed of a metal material such as iron and is formed into a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, and is fastened and fixed to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose outer shape in view is formed in a substantially circular shape, and is axially supported coaxially with the gear damper receiving member 342 so that its outer shape in the axial direction is formed in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341 A fixed posture detection member 343, an upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits from above to the circular portions of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343, and an upper cover member 344 across the body member 341 Corners inserted through the lower cover member 345 and the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the cylindrical portion 343a of the attitude detection member 343, which are opposed to each other. The regulating rod member 346, a peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft hole 341b coaxial with the body member 341 mainly includes a swing member 360 which is disposed on the front end of the body member 341, a.

ギアダンパ受け部材342は、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される筒状の筒状部342aと、外周面に沿ってギア歯状に形成されるギア部342bと、を主に備える。また、姿勢検出部材343は、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される筒状の筒状部343aと、その筒状部343aから最も離間した位置(図11の奥側)に軸心方向に沿って延設される板状のセンサ検出片343bと、を主に備える。   The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 342a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. In addition, the attitude detection member 343 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 343a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a position farthest from the cylindrical portion 343a (back side in FIG. 11) in the axial direction. And a plate-like sensor detection piece 343b extending along the main axis.

筒状部342a,343aは、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される部分であって、内周側にレバー支持軸331d1(図10参照)が挿通される。これにより、レバー部材340がレバー支持軸331d1を軸に揺動可能とされる。   The cylindrical portions 342a and 343a are portions that are inserted into the shaft holes 341b of the main body member 341, and a lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted on the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

ギア部342bは、ギアダンパ338(図10参照)と歯合される部分であって、ギアダンパ338が発生する粘性抵抗をレバー部材340に伝達する部分である。   The gear portion 342 b is a portion that meshes with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

センサ検出片343bは、第1センサ部材325a1又は第2センサ部材325a2(図18(c)参照)の隙間を通過することでレバー部材340の姿勢を検出可能とする部分である。   The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion that can detect the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

剥離部材350は、レバー部材340の軸孔341bと同軸で配置されレバー支持軸331d1(図10参照)に挿通される挿通孔352を備える板状の本体部材351と、その本体部材351の上側に固定される矩形状の嵩上げ部材353と、その嵩上げ部材353の上側に配置され本体部材351に締結固定されると共に磁性体材料から形成される磁石部材354と、を主に備える。   The peeling member 350 is disposed coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340, has a plate-like main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 that is inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and an upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 that is arranged on the upper side of the raising member 353 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and made of a magnetic material.

磁石部材354は、本体部材341と対向配置され、本体部材351に締結固定されるので、本体部材341と本体部材351とを合体したり、分離させたりする働きを持つ。   The magnet member 354 is disposed to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351. Therefore, the magnet member 354 functions to unite or separate the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

図12は、レバー部材340の本体部材341、上部カバー部材344、下部カバー部材345及び首振り部材360の正面分解斜視図である。   FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 340.

レバー部材340の本体部材341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部341aと、その本体部341aの略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、その軸孔341bの正面側において左右方向に穿設される規制孔341cと、本体部341aの正面側端部において本体部341aの延設方向に対して下方(図12下方)に傾斜して延設される左右一対の首振り部材支持部341dと、その首振り部材支持部341dの根本側で左右方向に穿設される軸孔341eと、その軸孔341eの正面側において左右方向に穿設される規制孔341fと、を主に備える。   The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a, and A restriction hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b, and an inclination extending downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extending direction of the main body 341a at the front side end of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swinging member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the base side of the swinging member support portion 341d, and a left-right direction drilled in the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The restriction hole 341f is mainly provided.

軸孔341bは、筒状部342a,343a(図11参照)が挿通されると共にレバー支持軸331d1が挿通される貫通孔である。即ち、この軸孔341bの軸と同軸にレバー部材340の本体部材341と、剥離部材350とが軸支される。   The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

規制孔341cは、角度規制棒部材346が支持される貫通孔である。   The restriction hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle restriction rod member 346 is supported.

軸孔341eは、首振り部材360を軸支する軸支棒363が挿通される貫通孔であり、規制孔341fは首振り部材360の揺動角度を規制する規制棒365が挿通される貫通孔である。なお、規制孔341fに比較して軸孔341eの方が軸支棒363の周りに緩衝部材364が配設される分、内径が大きくされる。   The shaft hole 341e is a through-hole through which the shaft support bar 363 that supports the swinging member 360 is inserted, and the restriction hole 341f is a through-hole through which the restriction bar 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swinging member 360 is inserted. It is. Note that the inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the restriction hole 341f by the amount of the buffer member 364 disposed around the shaft support bar 363.

上部カバー部材344は、樹脂材料から形成され、レバー部材340の本体部材341に上側から締結固定される部材であって、背面側に軸孔341bを中心とする円に沿った曲面を形成する態様とされるガイド部344aと、そのガイド部344aに連設されレバー部材340の本体部341に上側から外嵌可能な断面コ字形状に形成される外嵌部344bと、それらガイド部344a及び外嵌部344bを連結する連結部344cと、を主に備える。連結部344cは、厚さが薄くされる(図22参照)。   The upper cover member 344 is formed of a resin material, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from the upper side, and forms a curved surface along a circle centering on the shaft hole 341b on the back side. A guide portion 344a, an outer fitting portion 344b that is connected to the guide portion 344a and can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340, and has a U-shaped cross section. And a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The connecting portion 344c is thinned (see FIG. 22).

下部カバー部材345は、樹脂材料から形成され、レバー部材340の本体部材341に下側から締結固定される部材であって、軸孔341bを中心とする円に沿った形状で左右方向に延設される背面ガイド部345aと、レバー部材340の本体部341に下側から外嵌可能な断面コ字形状に形成される外嵌部345bと、外嵌部345bを挟んで背面ガイド部345aの反対側に配設され正面側へ向けて湾曲形成される正面曲面部345cと、その正面曲面部345cの左右の端部から正面側に延設される正面ガイド部345dと、を主に備える。   The lower cover member 345 is a member made of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centering on the shaft hole 341b. The rear guide portion 345a, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted from the lower side to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340, and the back guide portion 345a across the outer fitting portion 345b. A front curved surface portion 345c that is disposed on the side and is curved toward the front surface, and a front guide portion 345d that extends from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

背面ガイド部345aは、上部カバー部材344のガイド部344aと共に、内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1(図10参照)に沿って配設される部分である。組立状態において、背面ガイド部345a及びガイド部344aの縁部を覆い隠す態様で外側ケース部材320の前カバー321(図8参照)や上カバー322(図8参照)が配設される。これにより、背面ガイド部345a及びガイド部344aは、内側ケース部材330に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が侵入することを防止することができる。   The back guide portion 345a is a portion disposed along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are disposed in a manner that covers the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. Thereby, the back surface guide part 345a and the guide part 344a can prevent dust and a ball (game ball, game medium) from entering the inner case member 330.

正面曲面部345c及び正面ガイド部345dは、共に首振り部材360の本体部材361の揺動を案内(図11参照)する部分である。正面曲面部345cによって、首振り部材360の回転方向の位置ずれや、レンズ部材317(図10参照)を押し込まれた際の衝撃が受け止められ、正面ガイド部345dによって、首振り部材360が軸方向に位置ずれすることが抑制される。   Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swinging of the main body member 361 of the swinging member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives a displacement in the rotational direction of the swinging member 360 and an impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in. The front guide portion 345d causes the swinging member 360 to move in the axial direction. Is prevented from being displaced.

なお、下部カバー部材345は、内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1(図10参照)の下端部と対向配置されるので、レバー部材340が押し下げ動作される際に外側ケース部材320(図8参照)にレバー部材340の本体部材341(金属材料から形成される)が直接当接することを防止することができる。即ち、間に樹脂材料から形成される下部カバー部材345が配設されることで、レバー部材340と外側ケース部材320とが当接した場合の衝撃を緩和することができる。   Since the lower cover member 345 is disposed opposite to the lower end portion of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (formed of a metal material) of the lever member 340 from coming into direct contact. That is, the lower cover member 345 formed of a resin material is disposed therebetween, whereby the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 abut can be mitigated.

首振り部材360は、レバー部材340の本体部材341の正面側端部に配設され軸孔341eを軸に揺動可能とされる部材であって、首振り部材支持部341dの左右方向外側に配設される側壁部361aを有すると共に断面コ字状に形成される板状の本体部材361と、その本体部材361の正面側の壁部に係止されると共に本体部材361と同軸で軸支される板状のモータ固定板362と、本体部材361の軸孔361c及び軸孔341eに挿通される円柱形状の軸支棒363と、その軸支棒363を内嵌すると共に軸孔341eに外嵌される緩衝部材364と、その緩衝部材364に巻き付け支持されるねじりバネSP2と、規制孔341fに挿通固定される円柱形状の規制棒365と、モータ固定板362に締結固定されモータ固定板362の面に垂直な方向に直線的な振動を発生させるボイスコイルモータから構成される振動装置366と、を主に備える。   The swing member 360 is a member that is disposed at the front side end portion of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and can swing around the shaft hole 341e, and on the outer side in the left-right direction of the swing member support portion 341d. A plate-like main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361 a and having a U-shaped cross section, and a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361 and coaxial with the main body member 361. The plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362, the columnar shaft support rod 363 inserted through the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. The buffer member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound around and supported by the buffer member 364, the columnar regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 are fastened and fixed. A vibration device 366 comprised of a voice coil motor that generates a linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the plate 362 mainly comprises a.

本体部材361は、互いに対向配置される一対の板状の側壁部361aと、その側壁部361aを正面側の端部で連結する正面壁部361bと、一対の側壁部361aに同軸で円形に穿設され緩衝部材364が内嵌される軸孔361cと、その軸孔361cを中心とした円に沿って形成され規制棒365が挿通される長孔状の角度規制孔361dと、側壁部361a及び正面壁部361bの上側で互いに離反する方向に折曲形成され首振り操作部材310が締結固定される固定板部361eと、を主に備える。   The main body member 361 includes a pair of plate-like side wall portions 361a arranged opposite to each other, a front wall portion 361b that connects the side wall portions 361a at the front end portions, and a pair of side wall portions 361a that are coaxially and circularly drilled. A shaft hole 361c in which the buffer member 364 is fitted, a long hole-shaped angle regulating hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, and a side wall 361a; It mainly includes a fixed plate portion 361e that is bent in a direction away from each other on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b and to which the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

側壁部361aの背面側端部の外形が軸孔361cを中心とした円形に形成されているので、側壁部361aの背面側端部を正面曲面部345cに摺動させた状態で本体部材361を揺動させることができる。   Since the outer shape of the rear side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circular shape centering on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is moved in a state where the rear side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c. It can be swung.

軸孔361cは、軸孔341eと同様に、緩衝部材364に外嵌支持される。これにより、首振り部材360側で生じる振動がレバー部材340の本体部材341側へ伝達することを抑制することができる。   The shaft hole 361c is externally supported by the buffer member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swinging member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

角度規制孔361dは、樹脂材料から形成される緩衝部材361d1を備える。緩衝部材361d1は角度規制孔361dの内周面を覆う態様で取り付けられる。これにより、規制棒365が角度規制孔361dに当接する際の衝撃を抑制することができる。   The angle regulation hole 361d includes a buffer member 361d1 formed from a resin material. The buffer member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. Thereby, the impact at the time of the control rod 365 contact | abutting to the angle control hole 361d can be suppressed.

モータ固定板362は、本体部材361の正面壁部361bに対して垂直に係止される板状の本体部362aと、その本体部362aの左右端部で折曲される一対の側壁部362bと、を主に備える。   The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-like main body portion 362a that is vertically locked with respect to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right end portions of the main body portion 362a. Is mainly provided.

本体部362aは、正面側に突起362a1が凸設され、その突起362a1が正面壁部361bに穿設される孔に差し込まれることで係止される。   The main body portion 362a is locked by projecting a protrusion 362a1 on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

側壁部362bは、軸孔341eと同径の軸孔362b1が穿設され、緩衝部材364に外嵌支持される部分であって、首振り部材支持部341dの左右方向内側に配設される。即ち、首振り部材支持部341dは、側壁部361aと側壁部362bとに挟まれる形で組立られる。   The side wall 362b has a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e, and is a portion that is externally supported by the buffer member 364, and is disposed on the inner side in the left-right direction of the swinging member support 341d. That is, the swinging member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

緩衝部材364は、本体部材341に外側から挿通される筒状部材であって、差し込み先端側である差し込み部364aが小径に形成され、その差し込み部364aよりも根本側に形成される根本部364bが差し込み部364aに比較して大径に形成される。   The buffer member 364 is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside. The insertion portion 364a that is the insertion tip side is formed with a small diameter, and the root portion 364b that is formed on the root side with respect to the insertion portion 364a. Is formed larger in diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

緩衝部材364に外嵌支持されるものの内、本体部材361は根本部364bに外嵌され、本体部材341及びモータ固定板362は差し込み部364aに外嵌される。   Of the members that are externally fitted and supported by the buffer member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

振動装置366は、電磁力により一対の部材を直線方向に近接離反させる態様で互いに動作させる装置であって、モータ固定板362に締結固定されると共に周囲に銅線が巻き付けられた筒状部材であるボビン部材366aと、そのボビン部材366aの内周面よりも外径が小径とされる円筒およびボビン部材366aの外周面よりも内径が大径とされる円筒が同軸で配置され円板形状の板で連結される押し付け部材366b(図19参照)と、を主に備える。   The vibration device 366 is a device that operates a pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force. The vibration device 366 is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362 and is wound around a copper wire. A certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are coaxially arranged and have a disk shape. And a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

押し付け部材366bは、内側の円筒が軸心方向で極性が変化する磁性体材料から形成される。   The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

ねじりバネSP2は、一方の端部が本体部材341に係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP2により、首振り部材360が、本体部材341に対して倒れる方向に付勢される。   One end of the torsion spring SP <b> 2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP <b> 2 biases the swinging member 360 in the direction in which it is tilted with respect to the main body member 341.

図13は、首振り操作部材310の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図13では、背面側枠部材311の図示が省略される。図13に示すように、首振り操作部材310は、背面側枠部材311(図11参照)と、その背面側枠部材311が締結固定されると共に首振り部材360の固定板部361eに締結固定される円環板状の中間枠部材312と、その中間枠部材312との位相が一致された状態で中間枠部材312の正面側に締結固定される振動案内部材313と、その振動案内部材313から凸設される導光部材313aが挿通されると共に中心部に孔を有さない円盤形状に形成される振動部材314と、その振動部材314の中央部に固定される振動コイルスプリングCS1を挟んで振動部材314と対向配置されるスイッチ部材315と、そのスイッチ部材315の正面側から外嵌される中間部材316と、その中間部材316を背面側に収容すると共に振動部材314に外嵌支持されるレンズ部材317と、を主に備える。   FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. In addition, illustration of the back side frame member 311 is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the rear side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the rear side frame member 311 and to the fixing plate portion 361 e of the swing member 360. An annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312, a vibration guide member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the phases of the intermediate frame member 312 are matched, and the vibration guide member 313 A light guide member 313a that protrudes from the center is inserted and a vibration member 314 that is formed in a disk shape that does not have a hole in the center and a vibration coil spring CS1 that is fixed to the center of the vibration member 314 The switch member 315 disposed opposite to the vibration member 314, the intermediate member 316 fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 are accommodated on the back side. A lens member 317 which is fitted supported on the vibrating member 314, mainly comprises.

上述した構成により、首振り操作部材310は、中間枠部材312及び振動案内部材313が互いに固定され、振動部材314及びレンズ部材317が互いに固定され、スイッチ部材315及び中間部材316が互いに固定される。   With the configuration described above, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. .

中間枠部材312は、円環板形状の底部312aと、その底部312aの外周から全周に亘って前方に延設される側壁部312bと、底部312aの形成する面に垂直な方向で正面側に立設される複数の円柱形状のスイッチ支持棒312cと、底部312aの背面側上部に前後方向に移動可能に配設される裏ボタン部材312dと、を主に備える。   The intermediate frame member 312 has an annular plate-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a, and a front surface in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. A plurality of cylindrical switch support bars 312c, and a back button member 312d that is movably disposed in the front-rear direction on the back side of the bottom 312a.

底部312aは、図13における上下左右の端部に径方向から中心側へ向けて凹設される矩形状の凹設部312a1を備える。   The bottom portion 312a includes rectangular recessed portions 312a1 that are recessed from the radial direction toward the center at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

凹設部312a1は、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fが挿通される部分であって、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fの先端部が側壁部312bに係止される(図21(a)参照)ことで、スイッチ部材315が中間枠部材312に対して引き抜き不能に配設される。   The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the distal end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Thus, the switch member 315 is disposed so that it cannot be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

スイッチ支持棒312cは、振動案内部材313、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315に共通で挿通される部材である。これにより、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315の前後方向(各部材の積層方向)の動作時に、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が動作方向に傾くことを防止することができる。そのため、例えば、レンズ部材317に前後方向と傾斜した方向から力がかけられた場合にも、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作に抵抗が生じることを抑制でき、押し込み操作の操作性を向上させることができる。また、振動部材314が振動装置366により振動する場合に、振動部材314が傾くことを抑制することができる。   The switch support bar 312c is a member that is inserted through the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315 in common. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 from being inclined in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of the respective members). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress resistance from being pushed in the lens member 317 and to improve the operability of the push-in operation. . Further, when the vibration member 314 is vibrated by the vibration device 366, the vibration member 314 can be prevented from being inclined.

なお、ここで振動装置366の振動とは、部材が細かに振るえる振動や、部材が直線方向に移動し移動終端で他の部材に衝突して戻ってくることを繰り返す往復動作などを意味する。   Here, the vibration of the vibration device 366 means a vibration that the member shakes finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, and collides with another member at the end of movement and returns.

裏ボタン部材312dは、底部312aとの間に介設されるコイルスプリングにより普段は背面側に張り出された位置に配置され、正面側の中央部に板状の検出片312d1を備える。   The back button member 312d is usually disposed at a position protruding to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the bottom button 312a and includes a plate-like detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

振動案内部材313は、正面側に複数(本実施形態では8本)立設される導光部材313aと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通される複数の挿通孔313bと、下端部において正面側に配設されるフォトカプラ形式の第1センサ部材313cと、上端部において背面側に配設されるフォトカプラ形式の第2センサ部材313dと、を主に備える。   The vibration guide member 313 includes a plurality of light guide members 313a erected on the front side (eight in this embodiment), a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted, and a front end side at the lower end. A photocoupler-type first sensor member 313c provided and a photocoupler-type second sensor member 313d disposed on the back side at the upper end portion are mainly provided.

導光部材313aは、背面側にLED等の発光部材が配設される透明部材である。導光部材313aは、振動部材314、スイッチ部材315及び中間部材316に挿通されることで、先端部がレンズ部材317に対して対向配置(近接配置)される。そのため、発光部材から照射される光をレンズ部材317付近まで導くことができ、レンズ部材317を発光させる効果を向上させることができる。   The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is disposed on the back side. The light guide member 313 a is inserted into the vibration member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316, so that the distal end portion is disposed opposite to the lens member 317 (closely disposed). Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

また、上述したように、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315の前後方向(各部材の積層方向)の動作時に、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が動作方向に傾くことが防止されるので、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が傾くことで導光部材313aと当接し、導光部材313aが破損することを抑制することができる。   Further, as described above, the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Further, when the switch member 315 is inclined, it can be prevented from coming into contact with the light guide member 313a and damaging the light guide member 313a.

第1センサ部材313cは、スイッチ部材315に配設される検出片315g(図21(a)参照)が隙間を通過したことを検出し、スイッチ部材315の配置を検出する検出部材である。   The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) disposed on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

第2センサ部材313dは、検出片312d1が隙間を通過したことを検出し、後述する首振り操作部材310の首振りの姿勢を検出する検出部材である。   The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects a swinging posture of a swing operation member 310 described later.

振動部材314は、断面の外径形状が底部312aと略同一形状で形成されると共に中央部に孔が開口形成されない略円板形状の本体部314aと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通される複数(本実施形態では4箇所)のスイッチ支持孔314bと、本体部314aの中央部から正面側に円筒形状に凸設され振動コイルスプリングCS1が巻き付け支持される中央筒状部314cと、スイッチ支持棒312cの先端部から押し込みコイルスプリングCS2に続いて挿通されるスイッチ受け部材314dと、本体部314aの下部において前後方向に第1センサ部材313cを収容可能な形状で穿設されるセンサ収容孔314eと、導光部材313aを挿通可能とされる導光孔314fと、を主に備える。   The vibration member 314 has a cross-sectional outer diameter shape that is substantially the same as the bottom portion 312a and a plurality of (through a substantially disc-shaped main body portion 314a in which no hole is formed in the central portion and a switch support rod 312c. In this embodiment, the switch support holes 314b are provided at four locations, the central cylindrical portion 314c is projected in a cylindrical shape from the central portion to the front side of the main body portion 314a, and the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and the switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted through the push-in coil spring CS2 from the front end portion thereof, a sensor receiving hole 314e drilled in a shape capable of storing the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the main body portion 314a, A light guide hole 314f through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted is mainly provided.

なお、振動コイルスプリングCS1に比較して、押し込みコイルスプリングCS2は、弾性係数が小さくされる。   Note that the pushing coil spring CS2 has a smaller elastic coefficient than the vibration coil spring CS1.

本体部314aは、外形形状が底部312aと略同一形状で形成されるので、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fを外周部分に4箇所形成される凹設部を通して挿通させることができる。   Since the outer shape of the main body 314a is substantially the same as that of the bottom 312a, the arm 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through four recessed portions formed in the outer peripheral portion.

スイッチ受け部材314dは、正面側にスイッチ支持孔314bよりも大径とされる大径部314d1が形成される円筒部材であって、正面側からスイッチ支持孔314bに挿通されることで、大径部314d1がスイッチ支持孔314bに係止される。なお押し込みコイルスプリングCS2は、外径がスイッチ支持孔314bよりも小径で形成される。   The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member in which a large-diameter portion 314d1 having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b is formed on the front side, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side so as to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The pushing coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

スイッチ部材315は、円板形状に形成される本体部315aと、その本体部315aの中央部から正面側(図13左側)へ向けてカップ上に張出形成されるバネ受け部315bと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通可能とされるスイッチ支持孔315cと、導光部材313aを挿通可能に形成される導光孔315dと、上下中央(図13の上下中央)に配置される一対のスイッチ受け部材314dに挿通される案内軸315eと、凹設部312a1に挿入され係止される腕部315fと、第1センサ部材313cの隙間を通過可能とされると共に本体部315aの下部(図13下側)において背面側に凸設される板状の検出片315gと、を主に備える。   The switch member 315 includes a disc-shaped main body 315a, a spring receiving portion 315b formed on the cup so as to project from the center of the main body 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch A switch support hole 315c through which the support bar 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members disposed at the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). The guide shaft 315e inserted through 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the gap between the first sensor member 313c can be passed and the lower portion of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13) ) And a plate-like detection piece 315g that protrudes on the back side.

スイッチ支持孔315cは、スイッチ支持棒312cの外径よりも大きな径で形成され、スイッチ受け部材314dの大径部314d1の外径よりも小さな径で形成される。これにより、スイッチ部材315が振動部材314に近接する方向に移動する場合に、大径部314d1でスイッチ部材315を支えることができる。   The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support bar 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. Thereby, when the switch member 315 moves in the direction approaching the vibration member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large-diameter portion 314d1.

案内軸315eは、スイッチ受け部材314dに挿通されるので、振動部材314に対するスイッチ部材315の傾きを抑制することができる。   Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibration member 314 can be suppressed.

中間部材316は、導光部材313aを挿通可能とされる導光孔316aを備え、スイッチ部材315に相対回転不能に外嵌固定される。   The intermediate member 316 includes a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

図14(a)は、偏心カム部材333の正面図であり、図14(b)は、偏心カム部材333の底面図であり、図14(c)は、図14(a)のXIVc−XIVc線における偏心カム部材333の断面図である。   14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in a line.

図14に示すように、偏心カム部材333は、回転ギアとして形成される本体部333aと、その本体部333aの回転軸と同軸に配設される筒状の筒状部333bと、その筒状部333bに内接する円に沿って軸方向に延設され筒状部333bより若干短く形成されると共に内部が中空とされるカム部333cと、筒状部333bの先端部に軸方向に沿って切り欠かれる一対の切り欠き333dと、筒状部333bとカム部333cとを双方の軸を通る方向で連結する板状のリブ部333eと、本体部333aのギア部分を覆う円板形状の傘部333fと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body portion 333a formed as a rotating gear, a cylindrical tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with a rotation axis of the main body portion 333a, and a cylindrical shape thereof. A cam portion 333c that extends in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b, is slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 333b, and is hollow inside, and a tip portion of the cylindrical portion 333b along the axial direction. A pair of cutouts 333d to be cut out, a plate-like rib portion 333e that connects the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disc-shaped umbrella that covers the gear portion of the main body portion 333a Part 333f.

本体部333a及びカム部333cは、軸方向にずれて(2層構造で)配置される。カム部333cは、中空とされるので、レバー部材340に当接した場合に、カム部333cが内側に若干撓む(弾性変形する)ことによって衝撃を吸収することができる。   The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be shifted in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when the cam portion 333c comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c is slightly bent inward (elastically deformed) to absorb an impact.

カム部333cは、外形が円形で形成される中空の環状部分であって、本体部333aに偏心して固定される。   The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

切り欠き333dは、位相検出部材334(図15参照)との相対的な位相を不変とするためのものであり、対向配置される一対の切り欠きが周方向の長さを違えて形成されることで、位相検出部材334を180度反転して組み付けることを防止することができる。   The notches 333d are for making the relative phase with the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) unchanged, and a pair of notches arranged opposite to each other are formed with different circumferential lengths. As a result, it is possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being inverted 180 degrees and assembled.

リブ部333eが、カム部333cの筒状部333bから最も離間する位置と筒状部333bとを連結する態様で配設されることで、中空形成されるカム部333cの内で最も強度的に弱くなる部分の強度を向上させることができる。これにより、カム部333cが破損することを抑制することができる。   The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the cylindrical portion 333b is connected to a position farthest from the cylindrical portion 333b of the cam portion 333c, so that the strength of the cam portion 333c formed hollow is most strong. The strength of the weakened portion can be improved. Thereby, it can suppress that the cam part 333c is damaged.

なお、リブ部333eは、長手方向の途中で部分的に分断されても良い。これにより、カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが小さい場合にはリブ部333eに荷重をかけず、カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが大きい場合にのみリブ部333eの分断された部分が互いに当接するようにすることができる。これにより、リブ部333eが非当接の間(カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが小さい場合)にはリブ部333eが疲労することを抑制できるので、リブ部333eの耐久性を向上させることができる。   The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. Thereby, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam part 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib part 333e, and the rib part 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam part 333c is large. The parts can be brought into contact with each other. Accordingly, the rib portion 333e can be prevented from being fatigued while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of flexure (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), and thus the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made.

図15(a)は、位相検出部材334の正面図であり、図15(b)は、位相検出部材334の底面図であり、図15(c)は、図15(a)のXVc−XVc線における位相検出部材334の断面図である。なお、図15(c)では、組立状態(図17(a)参照)における環状凸部332i及び偏心カム軸331d2が想像線で図示される。   15A is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15B is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15C is XVc-XVc of FIG. 15A. It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in a line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

図15に示すように、位相検出部材334は途中で径が拡径される筒状に形成され、偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に外嵌軸支される軸支部334aと、その軸支部334aに連設され正面側(図15(c)上方)へ向かうほど拡径される(2段階で拡径される)拡径部334bと、その拡径部334bの正面側端部から軸方向に延設される板状の検出片334cと、切り欠き333dに合致する形状の回り止め突起334dと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is enlarged on the way, and a shaft support portion 334 a that is externally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331 d 2 (see FIG. 10), and its shaft support portion. A diameter-enlarged portion 334b that is connected to 334a and expands toward the front side (upward in FIG. 15C) (expanded in two steps), and an axial direction from the front-side end of the enlarged-diameter portion 334b Are mainly provided with a plate-like detection piece 334c extending in the shape and a detent projection 334d having a shape matching the notch 333d.

拡径部334bは、右カバー部材332の内面側に環状に凸設される環状凸部332i(図10参照)に外嵌される部分である。偏心カム軸331d2を環状凸部332iの内側面で支持し、環状凸部332iの外側面で位相検出部材334の拡径部334bを内周側から支持することで、偏心カム軸331d2を強固に支持し、偏心カム軸331d2が径方向から荷重を受けた場合に軸ずれすることを抑制することができる。   The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to an annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly provided on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is supported by the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i, and the diameter-enlarged portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 is supported from the inner peripheral side by the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, so that the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is strengthened. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when receiving a load from the radial direction.

検出片334cは、第3センサ部材325a3(図9参照)の隙間を通過可能とされる。検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間を通過すると、回り止め突起334dと切り欠き333dとが噛み合うことで位相検出部材334と相対的な位相が不変とされる偏心カム部材333の姿勢を検出することができる。   The detection piece 334c can pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose relative phase with the phase detection member 334 is unchanged is detected by the rotation projection 334d and the notch 333d engaging with each other. can do.

図16(a)は、レバー部材340の正面図であり、図16(b)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材340の側面図であり、図16(c)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材340の上面図である。   16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. It is a top view of the lever member 340 in the arrow XVIb direction view of Fig.16 (a).

図16(a)に示すように、軸孔341bに比較して、軸孔341eが、本体部材341の長手方向に向いた直線であって軸孔341bを通る直線よりも下方(図16(a)下方)に配置される。これによって、首振り部材360側で生じる荷重がレバー部材340の長手方向に沿って与えられることを抑制することができ、荷重をレバー部材340の回転方向に向けることができる。   As shown in FIG. 16A, compared to the shaft hole 341b, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line facing the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and below the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A ) Located below). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swinging member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed to the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

図16(b)に示すように、本体部材341は断面コ字状に形成され、そのコ字状の開放側に剥離部材350が配設される。嵩上げ部材353や磁石部材354と本体部材341との間には若干の隙間が空けられる。   As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U shape in cross section, and a peeling member 350 is disposed on the open side of the U shape. A slight gap is provided between the body member 341 and the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354.

これにより、剥離部材350が本体部材341に固定されている場合は、本体部材341のコ字状の開放側(図16(b)下方)を剥離部材350で埋めることで本体部材341の強度を確保することができる。   Thereby, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (downward in FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

また、剥離部材350が本体部材341に固定された状態から引きはがされ始める場合や、その引きはがされた状態(図23(a)参照)から剥離部材350が本体部材341に近接する方向へ移動する場合の移動抵抗を上昇させることができる。   Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state in which the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, or in the direction in which the peeling member 350 comes close to the main body member 341 from the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off (see FIG. The movement resistance when moving to can be increased.

これにより、本体部材341に対して剥離部材350が相対移動する際の移動抵抗を上昇させることができ、例えば、レバー部材340が揺動を規制される状態(図22(a)参照)でレバー部材340が過荷重を受け剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされた場合に、かけられていた荷重の勢いで本体部材341が高速で揺動することを防止することができる。   Accordingly, it is possible to increase the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341. For example, the lever member 340 is controlled in the state where the swinging is restricted (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 receives an overload and the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, the main body member 341 can be prevented from swinging at a high speed due to the momentum of the applied load.

図17(a)は、操作デバイス300の正面図であり、図17(b)は、図17(a)の矢印XVIIb方向視における操作デバイス300の側面図である。なお、図17では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態(遊技者に押し下げ操作された状態)が図示される。   FIG. 17A is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in a downward position (a state in which the player has performed a push-down operation).

図18(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図18(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIb−XVIIIb線における操作デバイス300の部分断面図であり、図18(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイス300の部分断面図である。また、図19は、図18(a)の首振り操作部材310の部分拡大図である。なお、図18(b)及び図18(c)は図18(a)よりも若干拡大してあり、図19では、首振り操作部材310の振動装置366の中心軸が上下方向に向けられた状態が図示される。   18A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18B is a portion of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly larger than FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibration device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is oriented in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

図18(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材336が固定側に配置されると、剥離部材350の下側側面に偏心カム部材333が当接され、上側側面にロック部材336が当接されることで、剥離部材350が両方向に揺動することを防止されるので、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に固定される。   As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is disposed on the fixed side with the swing operation member 310 disposed at the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 is applied to the lower side surface of the peeling member 350. Since the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface and the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position.

本実施形態のように、ロック部材336がロック軸331d3を中心に揺動され、そのロック部材336が剥離部材350の揺動をせき止める部分の、剥離部材350を挟んで反対側に偏心カム部材333が配置される場合、剥離部材350がロック部材336に揺動をせき止められる状態におけるロック部材336の姿勢を設計的に調整することができる。   As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung around the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the separation member 350 at the portion where the lock member 336 prevents the separation member 350 from swinging. Is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in design.

本実施形態では、ロック部材336の回転軸と剥離部材350の上側側面との距離が最も近づくとき、即ち、偏心カム部材333のカム部333cが剥離部材350の反対側に配置され筒状部333bが剥離部材350と当接される状態においてのみロック部材336を剥離部材350の上面に当接させることができる。   In this embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 and the cylindrical portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only in a state in which is in contact with the peeling member 350.

言い換えれば、ロック部材336の本体部336aの長さが、筒状部333bに剥離部材350が当接した状態で剥離部材350の上側側面にL字の鉤部が当接する長さに形成される。   In other words, the length of the main body 336a of the lock member 336 is formed such that the L-shaped buttocks abut on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 is in contact with the cylindrical portion 333b. .

そのため、ロック部材336が剥離部材350の上側側面に当接され、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置で固定された状態においては、必ず偏心カム部材333の筒状部333bが剥離部材350の下側の側面に当接される。従って、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置で固定された状態から、首振り操作部材310が上向きに移動する方向に過荷重がかけられた場合に、偏心カム部材333のカム部333cに過荷重がかけられることを防止することができ、偏心カム部材333が破損することを抑制することができる。   Therefore, in a state where the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the peeling member 350. It is abutted on the side surface. Therefore, when an overload is applied in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from a state in which the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It can prevent being applied and can prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

図18(b)に示すように、ギアダンパ受け部材342のギア部342bと、ギアダンパ受け部材342の背面側に配置されるギアダンパ338とが歯合される。ギアダンパ338は、後述するように、レバー部材340の揺動に対する粘性抵抗を生じる役割と、レバー部材340が後方へ向けて押し込む荷重を受けた場合に、その荷重に抵抗する抵抗力を発生させる役割を合わせ持つ。   As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are engaged with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swinging of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force that resists the load when the lever member 340 receives a load pushing backward. Have both.

ギアダンパ338を配設することにより、例えば、レバー部材340の本体部材341が剥離部材350から引きはがされた状態において、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を高速で操作する場合の抵抗は、大きくすることができ、一方で、レバー部材340がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により起き上がる場合のように速度が小さい場合の抵抗は、小さくすることができる。   By providing the gear damper 338, for example, when the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at a high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

これにより、揺動速度によらず、遊技者の高速の操作に対応した大きな抵抗を生じる場合に比較して、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力を小さく設定でき、ねじりバネSP1の設計自由度を向上させることができる。   As a result, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller and the design flexibility of the torsion spring SP1 can be improved as compared with the case where a large resistance corresponding to the high-speed operation of the player is generated regardless of the swing speed. be able to.

図18(c)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態において、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に配置されると共に、位相検出部材334の検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間に配置される。即ち、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に配置されると共に、位相検出部材334の検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間に配置される状態においてのみ、ロック部材336を揺動させることで剥離部材350の上側側面にロック部材336を当接させることが可能となる。   As shown in FIG. 18C, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. 334c is disposed in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. In other words, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is disposed in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is disposed in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. By doing so, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

また、後述するように、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされる場合には、第2センサ部材325a2の隙間からセンサ検出片343bが移動されることになる。そのため、ロック部材336が図18(a)の状態から揺動していないこと(センサ部材331fで検出)と、第2センサ部材325a2の隙間からセンサ検出片343bが移動されることとを検出することにより、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされたことを検出することができる。   As will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 is not swung from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thus, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

図20は、図17(b)のXX−XX線における首振り操作部材310の断面図である。なお、背面側枠部材311の図示が省略される。図20に示すように、裏ボタン部材312dは中間枠部材312の背面側に配設され、コイルスプリングで中間枠部材312から離反する方向へ付勢されるので、押し込み荷重(図20上方へ向けた荷重)がかけられない状態においては検出片312d1が第2センサ部材313dから離間される。一方で、裏ボタン部材312dに押し込み荷重(図20上方へ向けた荷重)が与えられ、検出片312d1が第2センサ部材313dの隙間に挿通されるまで裏ボタン部材312dが移動されることで、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込まれたことを検出することができる。   20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 taken along the line XX-XX in FIG. The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is disposed on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312 and is biased in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312 by the coil spring. In the state where no load is applied, the detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d. On the other hand, a pressing load (a load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d is pushed.

図21(a)及び図21(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における首振り操作部材310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図21(a)では、図18(a)及び図19の状態から振動装置366が動作して上方へ向けて負荷が生じた状態が図示され図21(b)では、図18(a)及び図19の状態からレンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。   FIGS. 21A and 21B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 21A shows a state in which the vibration device 366 is operated from the state of FIGS. 18A and 19 and a load is generated upward. In FIG. 21B, FIG. ) And the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG.

上述したように、スイッチ部材315は中間枠部材312から引き抜き不能に係止され、スイッチ部材315と中間枠部材312との間に振動部材314が介設され、その振動部材314は振動コイルスプリングCS1により中間枠部材312側(図21(a)下方)へ押し付けられる。   As described above, the switch member 315 is locked so as not to be pulled out from the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibration member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312. The vibration member 314 is the vibration coil spring CS1. Thus, it is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 (downward in FIG. 21A).

この状態から、振動装置366のボビン部材366aに巻かれる銅線(図示せず)に電流が流され生じる電磁力によって押し付け部材366bが振動部材314に押し付けられると、振動部材314がスイッチ部材315に押し付けられる方向に移動する。これにより、振動部材314に外嵌固定されるレンズ部材317が(図21(a)上方へ)移動する。この状態において、レンズ部材317は段部317aがスイッチ部材315に当接されるので、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することが困難となる(固くなる、押し込み不能状態)。   From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibration member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated when a current flows through a copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366, the vibration member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of pressing. As a result, the lens member 317 fitted and fixed to the vibration member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is in contact with the switch member 315, it is difficult to push in the lens member 317 (becomes hard and cannot be pushed in).

一方、振動部材314がレンズ部材317から離反されると、遊技者はレンズ部材317を押し込み可能となる(押し込み可能状態)。そのため、遊技者がレンズ部材317を通して入力操作するタイミングを振動部材314の駆動により指定することができる。   On the other hand, when the vibration member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push in the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

また、レンズ部材317を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、レンズ部材317が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されるので、遊技者の行う操作によってレバー部材340が受ける影響をパチンコ機10(図1参照)側で切替ることができる。   In addition, since a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a non-pushable state in which the lens member 317 is fixed so that it cannot be displaced and cannot be pushed in are configured, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

例えば、遊技者がレンズ部材317を断続的に繰り返し押し込む(連打する)場合、レンズ部材317が押し込まれた状態から戻る際に、その反作用で、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333(図18(a)参照)へ近接する方向に首振り操作部材310が負荷を受ける。そのため、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。   For example, when the player repeatedly pushes the lens member 317 repeatedly (striking), the lever member 340 is caused to react with the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a) when returning from the state where the lens member 317 is pushed. The swing operation member 310 is subjected to a load in a direction close to (see)). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

一方、押し込み不能状態とされる場合、遊技者の押し込み操作に対して首振り操作部材310全体が押し下げられるので、それによりレバー部材340も偏心カム部材333(図18(a)参照)から離反する方向に移動する。従って、遊技者がレンズ部材317を連打しても、首振り操作部材310が上方へ付勢力により戻ることにより偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが衝突するという事態を抑制することができる。   On the other hand, when the push-in is disabled, the entire swinging operation member 310 is pushed down by the player's push-in operation, so that the lever member 340 is also separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player strikes the lens member 317 repeatedly, the situation where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other when the swinging operation member 310 is returned upward by the biasing force can be suppressed.

なお、押し込み不能状態を構成する方法としては、鉤状の爪でレンズ部材317を係止する方法や、直線的な往復運動をするボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置366によりレンズ部材317を終端位置まで張り出させる(一方向に負荷をかけ続ける)方法等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置366によりレンズ部材317を終端位置まで張り出させる方法によれば、その振動装置366によってレンズ部材317を振動させることと、レンズ部材317を押し込み不能状態とすることとの両方の作用を生じさせることができる。   In addition, as a method of constructing the incompressible state, the lens member 317 is moved to the end position by a method of locking the lens member 317 with a hook-like claw or a vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor that performs a linear reciprocating motion. Examples include a method of overhanging (continuing a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the end position by the vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the lens member 317 is vibrated by the vibration device 366 and the lens member 317 is made incapable of being pushed in. Both effects can occur.

振動装置366のボビン部材366aに巻かれる銅線(図示せず)に流す電流の向きを反転させることで押し付け部材366bの移動方向を反転させることができる。ここで、振動部材314は電磁力の力で引かれるわけでは無いので、移動速度が遅くなる恐れがあるが、本実施形態では、振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力により振動部材314が押し付け部材366bに追従して、図21(b)下方へ移動する。   The direction of movement of the pressing member 366b can be reversed by reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366. Here, since the vibration member 314 is not attracted by the force of the electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slow. In this embodiment, the vibration member 314 is pressed against the pressing member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1. Following this, it moves downward in FIG.

これにより、押し付け部材366bと振動部材314とを締結固定することなく、レンズ部材317の振動を高速化することができる。   Thereby, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be speeded up without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

本実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時に振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力が抵抗となってかかることを防止することができる。詳述すると、図21(b)に示すように、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時には、レンズ部材317の背面側に形成される段部317aがスイッチ部材315の腕部315fに当接することでレンズ部材317及び振動部材314がスイッチ部材315と一体で移動する。そのため、振動コイルスプリングCS1の縮み具合が変化しないため、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時に振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力が抵抗となってかかることを防止することができる。   In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed in. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step 317a formed on the back side of the lens member 317 abuts on the arm 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member 317 and the vibration member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the contraction degree of the vibration coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed in.

なお、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作したあとは、スイッチ部材315の下側側面に当接されるスイッチ受け部材314d(図13参照)が押し込みコイルスプリングCS2の弾性回復力によりスイッチ部材315を押し上げるので、レンズ部材317は押し込み前の位置(図18(a)参照)に復帰する。   After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that is in contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed (see FIG. 18A).

即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する際にレンズ部材317の位置を復帰させる押し込みコイルスプリングCS2と、振動部材314の位置を復帰させる振動コイルスプリングCS1と、を別の部材で構成することができる。   That is, the pushing coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in and the vibration coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibration member 314 can be formed of different members.

本実施形態では、振動コイルスプリングCS1に比較して押し込みコイルスプリングCS2の弾性係数が小さくされるので、振動部材314を復帰させる速度は大きく確保しながら、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作は小さな力で行うことができる。従って、遊技者が受動的に感じる振動の大きさを確保しつつ、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作の容易性を向上させることができる。   In this embodiment, since the elastic coefficient of the pushing coil spring CS2 is made smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 can be improved while ensuring the magnitude of vibration that the player feels passively.

図22(a)及び図22(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図22(a)及び図22(b)では、ロック部材336が固定側に揺動された状態が図示され、図22(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に図22(b)では、図22(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が背面側(図22(b)右側)に押し込み操作された状態が図示される。   22A and 22B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 22A and 22B show a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position. In FIG. 22B, the state is illustrated, and the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed into the back side (right side in FIG. 22B) from the state of FIG. 22A is illustrated.

首振り操作部材310を支持するレバー部材340は、ねじりバネSP1によって、レバー支持軸331d1を中心に首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる方向(図22(a)時計回り)へ向けて付勢される。そのため、図22(a)の状態から、ロック部材336を解除方向(図22(a)時計回り)に揺動させても、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に保持することができる。   The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 about the lever support shaft 331d1 (clockwise in FIG. 22A). Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the releasing direction (FIG. 22 (a) clockwise) from the state of FIG. 22 (a), the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によるレバー部材340の揺動は、案内支持孔331e1,332e1、上カバー322及び偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340が当接することにより停止される。このように、レバー部材340を停止させる際に当接される箇所を複数用意することにより、レバー部材340にかけられる荷重を分散させることができ、レバー部材340が破損することを抑制することができる。以下、各当接箇所について詳述する。   The swing of the lever member 340 due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped by the lever member 340 coming into contact with the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the upper cover 322, and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of locations that are brought into contact when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. . Hereinafter, each contact location will be described in detail.

案内支持孔331e1,332e1には、角度規制棒部材346が挿通されるので、案内支持孔331e1,332e1の端部に角度規制棒部材346が当接することでレバー部材340の揺動を停止させることができる。なお、図10で上述したように、案内支持孔331e1,332e1はレバー部材340を揺動軸方向で挟んで配置されるので、レバー部材340を停止させる際にレバー部材340が長手方向を中心とした旋回方向に傾くことを抑制することができる。   Since the angle restricting bar member 346 is inserted into the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the swinging of the lever member 340 is stopped by the angle restricting bar member 346 coming into contact with the end portions of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. Can do. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, the guide support holes 331 e 1 and 332 e 1 are disposed with the lever member 340 sandwiched in the swing axis direction, so that when the lever member 340 is stopped, the lever member 340 is centered on the longitudinal direction. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

上カバー322には、上部カバー部材344の連結部344cが当接可能とされる。連結部344cには、上カバー322と垂直に当接する部分である段部344c1が形成され、連結部344cとレバー部材340との間には空間が形成される(図22(a)参照)。そのため、段部344c1に上カバー322が当接した場合にも、連結部344cが空間に向けて変形可能とされるので、連結部344cと上カバー322との間で生じる衝撃を緩和する事ができる。   The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can contact the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a step portion 344c1 that is a portion that contacts the upper cover 322 perpendicularly, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 abuts on the stepped portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that an impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be reduced. it can.

これにより、本体部材341に衝撃が伝達されることを抑制することができるので、本体部材341の構成を簡素化することができ、レバー部材340全体の軽量化を図ることができる。この場合、ねじりバネSP1に必要な弾性係数を抑制することができ、それに伴って偏心カム部材333を駆動させる第1駆動装置335(図10参照)に必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。   Thereby, since it can suppress that an impact is transmitted to the main body member 341, the structure of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight reduction of the lever member 340 whole can be achieved. In this case, the elastic coefficient required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and accordingly, the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) that drives the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

また、上部カバー部材344には衝撃を緩和する役割の他に、内側ケース部材330の内側に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が入り込むことを防止する役割がある。即ち、レバー部材340が揺動しても(図23(b)参照)、上部カバー部材344と上カバー322との間が常に閉鎖された状態とされるので、内側ケース部材330の内側に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が入り込むことを防止することができる。   The upper cover member 344 has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls and game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330 in addition to the role of reducing the impact. That is, even if the lever member 340 is swung (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that the dust is placed inside the inner case member 330. Or balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

更に、上部カバー部材344は揺動軸方向(図22(a)紙面垂直方向)で内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1と当接可能とされる。これにより、上部カバー部材344を用いて本体部材341が揺動軸方向にぐらつくことを抑制することができる。   Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (direction perpendicular to FIG. 22A). As a result, the main body member 341 can be prevented from wobbling in the swing axis direction using the upper cover member 344.

偏心カム部材333には、レバー部材340の剥離部材350が当接する。偏心カム部材333の筒状部333bを剥離部材350側に向けた状態で偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340を当接させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。   The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged by bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side.

図22(a)に示すように、操作デバイス300は、振動装置366の振動方向の中心軸を示す直線L1が軸支棒363を通る。そのため、振動装置366の振動の衝撃が軸支棒363へ与えられるが、軸支棒363とモータ固定板362(図12参照)との間には緩衝部材364(図12参照)が配設されるので、緩衝部材364により振動の衝撃を緩和することができる。これにより、レバー部材340へ伝わる振動を抑制することができる。   As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L <b> 1 indicating the central axis in the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 passes through the shaft support bar 363. For this reason, the vibration impact of the vibration device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, but a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) is disposed between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be reduced by the buffer member 364. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

直線L1と、レバー部材340の長手方向に沿った直線L2との間の角度が角度θ1とされる。これにより、振動装置366が発生させる振動を、直線L2に沿った方向成分と、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができ、パチンコ機10に伝達されパチンコ機10を振動させる負荷(直線L2に沿った方向の負荷)を抑制することができる。   An angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is an angle θ1. Thereby, the vibration generated by the vibration device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, and transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 to vibrate the pachinko machine 10. The load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2) can be suppressed.

また、同様に、レンズ部材317の押し込み方向(直線L1と平行)にかけられる力を、直線L2に沿った方向成分と、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができるので、レンズ部材317を押し込むことで、レバー支持軸331d1に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。   Similarly, the force applied in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) of the lens member 317 can be decomposed into a direction component along the straight line L2 and a direction component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

振動装置366がレバー支持軸331d1の正面側(図22(a)左側)に配置され、振動装置366が動作する際に生じる反作用が本体部材341の首振り部材支持部341dを下方に押し下げる方向に向けられる。そのため、振動装置366の振動により、本体部材341を偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に揺動させることができる。これにより、振動装置366の振動により偏心カム部材333が負荷を受けることを抑制することができる。   The vibration device 366 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction that occurs when the vibration device 366 operates causes the swinging member support portion 341d of the main body member 341 to push downward. Directed. Therefore, the main body member 341 can be swung in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 by the vibration of the vibration device 366. Thereby, it can suppress that the eccentric cam member 333 receives load by the vibration of the vibration apparatus 366. FIG.

図22(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作する状態において、裏ボタン部材312dが連結部344cに押し当てられる。この場合にレバー部材340側へ向けて生じる負荷の方向F1が、レバー支持軸331d1を中心にレバー部材340の首振り部材支持部341dを押し下げる方向へ向けられる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作することで偏心カム部材333へ向けた負荷が生じることを抑制することができる。   As shown in FIG. 22B, in the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed to push down the swinging member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a load on the eccentric cam member 333 from being generated by pushing the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作した状態では、直線L1と直線L2とが、角度θ2をなす。この角度θ2は、角度θ1よりも大きいので、振動装置366の振動の直線L2に沿った方向成分を図22(a)の状態に比較して小さくすることができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作することにより、パチンコ機10に伝達させる振動を抑制することができる。   In a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since the angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the direction component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibration device 366 can be made smaller than that in the state of FIG. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swing operation member 310.

また、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分を大きくすることができる。そのため、振動の反作用を利用してレバー部材340を図22(b)反時計回りに揺動させ易くすることができ、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作している遊技者が感じる振動のモードを直線L1に沿った直線方向の振動と、首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に回転する振動との複数種類の振動を現出させることができる。   In addition, the direction component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, the lever member 340 can be easily swung counterclockwise in FIG. 22B by utilizing the reaction of vibration, and the vibration mode felt by the player who pushes the swing operation member 310 is felt. A plurality of types of vibrations can be produced: vibrations in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibrations in which the swing operation member 310 rotates about the shaft support rod 363.

図23(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図23(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図23では、剥離部材350がロック部材336に揺動を規制された状態で本体部材341が剥離部材350から引きはがされ、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。   23A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. FIG. 23 shows a state in which the main body member 341 is pulled away from the peeling member 350 and the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336. A cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

図22に示す状態において、レンズ部材317を押し込む方向に所定量以上の荷重(磁力による吸着力以上の荷重)がかけられたり、首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向に所定量以上の荷重(磁力による吸着力以上の荷重)がかけられたりすることで、本体部材341が磁石部材354から引きはがされ、図23に示す状態に首振り操作部材310が移動する。これにより、ロック部材336と剥離部材350との間で大きな荷重がかかり、ロック部材336や剥離部材350が破損することを抑制することができる。   In the state shown in FIG. 22, a load of a predetermined amount or more (a load of an adsorption force or more by magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a load of a predetermined amount or more (by the magnetic force) in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is pulled off from the magnet member 354 and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. Thereby, it can suppress that a big load is applied between the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350, and the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350 are damaged.

なお、首振り操作部材310を押し下げた場合にレバー部材340が移動する方向の反対側に偏心カム部材333が配設され、首振り操作部材310をいくら押し下げても、偏心カム部材333側には荷重が伝達されないので、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。   An eccentric cam member 333 is disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

図23(b)に示すように、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間から移動することで、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされたことを検出することができる。   As shown in FIG. 23B, it is possible to detect that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341 by moving the sensor detection piece 343b from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2.

この場合、磁石部材354と本体部材341との間に生じていた磁力による吸着力が突然無くなり、首振り操作部材310が勢いよく下方へ移動する。そのため、レバー部材340が揺動しすぎてしまい、案内支持孔331e1,332e1に負担が生じる恐れがある。一方、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた際に、首振り操作部材310の背面側枠部材311と前カバー321とが対向配置され面当たりされることで、レバー部材340が回りすぎる場合にも、その負荷を背面側枠部材311又は前カバーが変形することで緩和することができる。これにより、レバー部材340が破損することを抑制することができる。   In this case, the attracting force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 moves downward vigorously. Therefore, the lever member 340 may swing too much, and there is a possibility that a burden is generated on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the rear side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are disposed to face each other, so that the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the surface. Even when it rotates too much, the load can be reduced by the deformation of the back frame member 311 or the front cover. Thereby, it can suppress that the lever member 340 is damaged.

なお、図23(a)に示す状態から、遊技者が下方にかけていた荷重を解くことで、本体部材341がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により図23(a)時計回りに揺動され、本体部材341が剥離部材350に再度吸着される。これにより、レバー部材340(及び本体部材341)の姿勢(配置)を安定化することができ、遊技者が次の操作を行いやすくすることができる。   23A, the main body member 341 is swung clockwise in FIG. 23A by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 by releasing the load applied by the player downward from the state shown in FIG. Is again adsorbed to the peeling member 350. Thereby, the attitude | position (arrangement | positioning) of the lever member 340 (and main body member 341) can be stabilized, and it can make it easy for a player to perform the next operation.

剥離部材350は本体部材341の揺動軸であるレバー支持軸331d1に軸支されるので、剥離部材350が本体部材341から剥離された状態においては、剥離部材350の重量が本体部材341の揺動方向にかからない。   Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331 d 1 that is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 is not enough for the main body member 341 to swing when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. Does not move in the direction of movement.

即ち、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着される状態と、本体部材341から剥離部材350が剥離される状態とでレバー支持軸331d1の前後の本体部材341の重量バランスが変化する。即ち、剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態の方が、本体部材341にかけられる首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向のモーメントが大きくなる。これにより、剥離部材350が剥離した後では、本体部材341が起き上がる速度を小さくすることができるので、剥離部材350に本体部材341が吸着する際に偏心カム部材333に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。   That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 is increased. Thereby, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 is suppressed. Can do.

また、本体部材341が断面コ字状に形成され、本体部材341のコ字状の開放側からコ字状の閉鎖側へ入り込む態様で剥離部材350が移動するので、本体部材341と剥離部材350との間で摩擦抵抗が生じる場合には、本体部材341が剥離部材350に吸着する速度を小さくすることができる。   Further, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering the U-shaped closing side from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341, so the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are moved. When the frictional resistance is generated between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 adsorbs to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

なお、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力は本体部材341に伝達され、剥離部材350には被伝達とされるため、剥離部材350と本体部材341とが引きはがされた状態でロック部材336または偏心カム部材333にねじりバネSP1の付勢力が働くことを防止できる。そのため、剥離部材350と本体部材341とが引きはがされた状態でロック部材336または偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止できる。   Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and is transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

なお、図23(a)の状態で、剥離部材350は偏心カム部材333とロック部材336とに固定されるので、再度、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に入ることで、本体部材341と剥離部材350とが吸着したことを検出することができる。   In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336. Therefore, when the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again, It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

図24(a)及び図24(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図24(a)では、図22(a)の状態からロック部材336が解除側(図24(a)時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示され、図24(b)では、図24(a)の状態から偏心カム部材333が約180度回転されレバー部材340が揺動された状態が図示される。また、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態におけるレバー部材340及び首振り操作部材310の外形が想像線で図示される。   24A and 24B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 24A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22A to the release side (FIG. 24A clockwise), and FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is illustrated. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

ロック部材336の検出片336eがセンサ部材331fの隙間に入ることでロック部材336が解除側に揺動したことを検出することができる。ロック部材336が解除側に揺動したことを検出した後で、第1駆動装置335の駆動ギア335b(図10参照)を回転させることで偏心カム部材333を回転させ、レバー部材340を揺動させることができる。なお、偏心カム部材333を1方向に連続して回転させても良いし、回転方向を途中で切り替えても良い。   When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 is swung to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 is swung to the release side, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335, and the lever member 340 is swung. Can be made. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched halfway.

偏心カム部材333が回転している間、レバー部材340は、ねじりバネSP1により偏心カム部材333に押し付けられる方向(図24(a)時計回り方向)に付勢される。そのため、偏心カム部材333の回転と連動して、レバー部材340は揺動する。これにより、遊技者の注目を首振り操作部材310に集めやすくできる。   While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is biased in a direction (FIG. 24 (a) clockwise direction) pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. Thereby, the player's attention can be easily collected on the swing operation member 310.

図24(a)又は図24(b)に示す状態で振動装置366が作動すると、その振動の反作用が直線L1に沿って本体部材341を押し下げる方向に働く。そのため、振動の反作用によって、偏心カム部材333から離反する方向にレバー部材340が揺動するので、振動装置366が動作することで偏心カム部材333に負荷がかけられることを抑制することができる。   When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of vibration, and therefore it is possible to suppress the load on the eccentric cam member 333 due to the operation of the vibration device 366.

レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する場合を考える。レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する際に、レンズ部材317に与えられる荷重の方向が直線L1に沿うと仮定すると、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することに伴って、レバー部材340が下方へ(図24(a)反時計回りに)揺動したり、首振り操作部材310が(図24(a)時計回りに)押し込み操作されたりする可能性がある。   Consider a case where the lens member 317 is pushed in. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed (FIG. 24 ( There is a possibility of swinging a) or turning the swing operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 24A).

本実施形態では、いずれの場合でも、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に揺動させる荷重が働くので、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することで偏心カム部材333に荷重が与えられることを抑制することができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。   In this embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 is applied. Therefore, the load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. Thereby, durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

図25(a)及び図25(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図25(a)では、図24(b)の状態から偏心カム部材333が反時計回りに所定角度θ3だけ回転された状態が図示され、図25(b)では、図24(b)の状態から偏心カム部材333が時計回りに所定角度θ3だけ回転された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。また、図25(a)及び図25(b)では、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態におけるレバー部材340及び首振り操作部材310の外形が想像線で図示される。   FIGS. 25A and 25B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 25A shows a state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state shown in FIG. 24B, and FIG. 25B shows the state shown in FIG. From this state, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and a sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25A and 25B, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

本実施形態では、首振り部材360が前側(図25反時計回り方向)に付勢されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持して押し下げ動作することを容易とすることができる。即ち、首振り操作部材310を押し下げるために図24(b)の状態から方向M1(図25(a)参照)に力を加えた場合に、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作(軸支棒363を中心に揺動させる操作)させることなく、即座に首振り操作部材310を押し下げ操作することができる。   In the present embodiment, the swinging member 360 is urged forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25), so that the player can easily hold the swinging operation member 310 and push it down. That is, when a force is applied in the direction M1 (see FIG. 25A) from the state of FIG. 24B to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swinging operation member 310 can be immediately pressed down without causing the swinging operation to swing around 363).

ここで、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離すことを可能とすると、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離間した位置から勢い付けて偏心カム部材333に衝突させることが可能となるので(図25(a)及び図25(b)において、首振り操作部材310を想像線の位置から実線の位置まで押し上げることが可能となるので)、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。   Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be urged from a position away from the eccentric cam member 333 and can collide with the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), the swinging operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材333を中空とすることで、偏心カム部材333の破損を防止することができる。即ち、偏心カム部材333の弾性変形によりレバー部材340からの荷重をうけとめ、偏心カム部材333が破損することを抑制できる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow. That is, it is possible to suppress the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged by receiving the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333.

上述したように、偏心カム部材333は、回転方向によらず、連続して回転し続けることで、レバー部材340を揺動動作させることができる。ここで、回転方向の特徴について説明する。   As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can swing the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, characteristics of the rotation direction will be described.

図25(a)に、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態(図24(a)の状態)における偏心カム部材333の位相(以下、この位相を「退避位相」と称す)からの回転角度を示す。即ち、退避位相から図25(a)の偏心カム部材333の位相まで回転するには、時計回りの回転で角度φ1だけ偏心カム部材333を回す必要がある。   FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “retraction phase”) when the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position (the state shown in FIG. 24A). Indicates the rotation angle. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25A, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by clockwise rotation.

図25(b)に、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態(図24(a)の状態)における偏心カム部材333の位相(退避位相)からの回転角度を示す。即ち、退避位相から図25(b)の偏心カム部材333の位相まで回転するには、反時計回りの回転で角度φ2だけ偏心カム部材333を回す必要がある。ここで、角度φ1は角度φ2に比較して小さい(φ1<φ2)。   FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle from the phase (retraction phase) of the eccentric cam member 333 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25B, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by counterclockwise rotation. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

偏心カム部材333が等速回転すると仮定すると、退避位相から偏心カム部材333を時計回りに回転させた方が、レバー部材340がねじりバネSP1で付勢される方向と偏心カム部材333の回転方向とが対向する期間(角度にして角度φ1の期間)を偏心カム部材333を反時計回りに回転させる場合(角度にして角度φ2の期間)に比較して短くすることができる。   Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 and the direction of rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are greater when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted phase. Can be shortened compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (period of angle φ2).

また、退避位置から偏心カム部材333を時計回りに回転させた方が、偏心カム部材333の回転方向とレバー部材340がねじりバネSP1で付勢される方向とが対向する状態において、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333とが当接する位置をレバー支持軸331d1に近づけることができる(図25(a)において偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが当接する位置を、図25(b)において偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが当接する位置よりもレバー支持軸331d1に近づけることができる)。この場合、レバー部材340に同一トルクがかけられていれば、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333とが当接する位置で生じる荷重が、小さくなる。そのため偏心カム部材333にかけられる負荷を小さくすることができるので、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。   Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. And the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 contact in FIG. 25A is the eccentric cam in FIG. 25B). The position can be closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 abut). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other is reduced. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

加えて、本実施形態では、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げ操作することで、偏心カム部材333に大きな荷重がかけられる恐れがあるので、偏心カム部材333を同一方向に連続で回転させる場合には、偏心カム部材333を図25(b)反時計回りに回転させることが好ましい。この場合、偏心カム部材333のリブ部333eが図25(b)の角度φ2の角度範囲を回転する場合には、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる荷重が抑制される(レバー支持軸331d1からレバー部材340と偏心カム部材との当接位置までの距離が長くなる)ので、偏心カム部材333がレバー部材340に近接する方向に移動するとしても偏心カム部材333が破損する可能性を低くすることができる。   In addition, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310, so the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25B, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer.) Even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in the direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

一方、偏心カム部材333のリブ部333eが図25(a)の角度φ1の角度範囲を回転する場合には、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる負荷は大きくなる(レバー支持軸331d1からレバー部材340と偏心カム部材333との当接位置までの距離が短くなる)が、偏心カム部材333がレバー部材340から離反する方向に回転しているため、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333との当接位置において偏心カム部材333に生じる負荷を抑制することができ、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。なお、偏心カム部材333は同一方向に回転させる必要はなく、角度φ1側、もしくは角度φ2側を往復回転動作(反転動作)するようにしても良い。   On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25A, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 increases (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened). However, since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated in a direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 are The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 at the contact position can be suppressed, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

図26(a)及び図26(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図26(a)では、図24(b)の状態から首振り操作部材310が後転方向(図26(a)時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示され、図26(b)では、図26(a)の状態から偏心カム部材333が退避位相まで回転され、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333に当接するまで揺動された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。   26A and 26B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 26A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 26A clockwise) from the state of FIG. 24B, and FIG. 26A illustrates the state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 26A to the retracted phase and is swung until the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, and the cross section of the swing operation member 310 is illustrated. Vision is omitted.

ここで、偏心カム部材333を回転させることでレバー部材340を揺動させる間に、専らレバー部材340を押し下げる操作を求める場合、図26(a)に示すように、レバー部材340の姿勢が変化せずに首振り操作部材310が後転方向(図26(a)時計回り)に揺動することは通常生じない。そのため、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込まれたことを検出することで、遊技者が誤操作(首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる操作)を行っていることを検出することができる。   Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is obtained exclusively while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. Without swinging, the swing operation member 310 does not normally swing in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 26 (a) clockwise). Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d has been pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation to lift the swing operation member 310).

この場合、偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340を通して荷重がかかり。偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがあるので、図26(b)に示すように偏心カム部材333を退避位相まで駆動ギア335bの駆動力で駆動させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。   In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 is damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 with the driving force of the drive gear 335b to the retracted phase as shown in FIG. Can be prevented.

このとき、偏心カム部材333を図26(b)時計回りに回転させることで、より安全に偏心カム部材333を回転させることができる。即ち、偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340との当接位置をレバー支持軸331d1から離反させながら偏心カム部材333を回転させることができ、偏心カム部材333を反時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる荷重を抑制することができる。   At this time, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

図27(a)及び図27(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図27(a)では、図24(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が押し下げ操作された状態が図示され、図27(b)では、図27(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に図27(a)時計回りに揺動された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。   27A and 27B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 27A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24A, and FIG. 27B shows a swing operation from the state of FIG. The state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise with respect to the shaft support rod 363 in FIG. 27A is shown, and the sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

図24(a)の状態から、図27(a)に示す方向D1に沿って力を加えると首振り操作部材310をレバー部材340ごと押し下げることができる。次いで、図27(a)の状態から、方向D1の反対方向である方向D2に沿って力を加えると、レバー部材340の姿勢はそのままで、首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363を軸に揺動させることができる。このように、2種類の動作(押し込みと回転など異なった態様の動作)を必要とせず、力の方向を反対にすることにより、一連の操作を行うことができるので、操作デバイス300の操作を容易とすることができる。   When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 which is the opposite direction of the direction D1 from the state shown in FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains unchanged, and the swing operation member 310 is pivoted about the pivot bar 363. It can be swung. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the direction of the force without requiring two types of operations (operations of different modes such as push-in and rotation). Can be easy.

この操作中において、レバー部材340及び剥離部材350は剛体として機能する(磁石部材354の吸着力により固定された状態が維持される)ので、遊技者が感じる操作感が変化することを抑制でき、首振り操作部材310の操作性を向上させることができる。   During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (a state in which the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are fixed by the attraction force of the magnet member 354 is maintained). The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

図27(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作すると、裏ボタン部材312dが上部カバー部材344の連結部344cに押し付けられることで、レバー部材340を図27(b)反時計回りに回転させる方向に負荷がかけられる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作する際にレバー部材340を図27(a)の位置に容易に固定する事ができ、図27(b)の状態で首振り操作部材310を保持することを容易にすることができる。   As shown in FIG. 27B, when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, so that the lever member 340 is moved in the opposite direction to FIG. A load is applied in the clockwise direction. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed at the position of FIG. 27A, and the swing operation member 310 is held in the state of FIG. To make it easy to do.

次いで、図28から図38を参照して、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300について説明する。第1実施形態では、偏心カム部材333の本体部333aとカム部333cとが一体で形成される場合を説明したが、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300は、偏心カム部材2333が、中心部が軸支される本体部材2333aと偏心して軸支されるカム部材2333bとの別部材で形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. The main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically pivotally supported are formed as separate members. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

なお、第2実施形態では、ねじりバネSP21からレバー部材2340を起き上げる方向に付勢力が働くとともに、ねじりバネSP22から首振り操作部材310を後転させる方向(図28(a)時計回り)に付勢力が働く。   In the second embodiment, an urging force acts in a direction in which the lever member 2340 is raised from the torsion spring SP21, and in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (FIG. 28 (a) clockwise). Energizing force works.

ねじりバネSP21は、軸支部331g,332g(図10参照)に巻き付けられ、一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332h(図9参照)に上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に下側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材2340は首振り操作部材310を起き上げる方向に付勢される。   The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts on the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from the upper side, and the other end to the angle regulating rod member 346. Abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is biased in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

ねじりバネSP22は、緩衝部材364(図12参照)に巻き付け支持され、一方の端部が正面曲面部345cに係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板2362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP22により、首振り部材2360が、本体部材341に対して後転する方向(図28(a)時計回り)に付勢される。   The torsion spring SP22 is wound around and supported by the buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swinging member 2360 in the reverse direction (FIG. 28 (a) clockwise) with respect to the main body member 341.

図28(a)及び図28(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図28(a)及び図28(b)では、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図28(b)では図28(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に後方に首振り操作された状態が図示される。本実施形態では、図28(a)の状態が初期位置とされ、図28(a)では、首振り操作部材310が振動装置2366の振動の反動により揺動され至る姿勢P21が想像線で図示される。また、図17(a)では第1実施形態における操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は操作デバイス2300と同じなので、操作デバイス2300とみなして説明する。以下、本実施形態において同様である。   FIGS. 28A and 28B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 28A and 28B show a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and FIG. 28B shows a state from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state where the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28A is the initial position, and in FIG. 28A, the posture P21 where the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is indicated by an imaginary line. Is done. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. Since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, the operation device 2300 will be described. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図28(a)に示すように、振動装置2366は、電磁力により一対の部材を直線方向に近接離反させる態様で互いに動作させる装置であって、モータ固定板2362に締結固定されると共に周囲に銅線が巻き付けられた筒状部材であるボビン部材2366aと、そのボビン部材2366aの内周面よりも外径が小径とされる円筒およびボビン部材2366aの外周面よりも内径が大径とされる円筒が同軸で配置され円板形状の板で連結される押し付け部材2366bと、を主に備える。なお、押し付け部材2366bは、内側の円筒が磁性体で形成される。   As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibration device 2366 is a device that operates a pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around it. A bobbin member 2366a that is a tubular member wound with a copper wire, a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a And a pressing member 2366b that is arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The pressing member 2366b has an inner cylinder made of a magnetic material.

ボビン部材2366a及び押し付け部材2366bは、第1実施形態におけるボビン部材366a及び押し付け部材366bよりも径方向の長さが小さくされ、振動装置2366の中心軸C21は、軸支棒363から前側(図28(a)左側)に離間して配置される。   The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are smaller in length in the radial direction than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibration device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support bar 363 (FIG. 28). (A) It is spaced apart at the left side.

ここで、本実施形態のようにレバー部材2340の先端に操作部として首振り操作部材310が配設される場合に、演出上遊技者に把持することを要求することがある。しかし、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したかどうかを検出することは困難であった。例えば、押し込みボタンを長押しすることを要求することもできるが、押し込みボタンの操作を要求することを多用すると、押し込みボタンの反力以上の力で毎回押し込みボタンを押し込む必要があるので、遊技者のストレスとなる恐れがある。   Here, when the swing operation member 310 is provided as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold it for production. However, it has been difficult to detect whether or not the player has held the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time, but if you frequently use the operation of the push button, it is necessary to push the push button every time with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button. There is a risk of stress.

これに対し、本実施形態では、振動装置2366の中心軸が軸支棒363の前側に離間して配置されるので、振動装置2366の振動の反作用により首振り部材2360が往復揺動し、首振り操作部材310の姿勢が図28(a)に示す姿勢と、姿勢P21との間を往復揺動する態様で変化する。これに伴い、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する前は、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込み方向(中心軸C21に平行な方向)に往復動作するので、それを第2センサ部材313d(図20参照)で検出することで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する前であることを検出することができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the central axis of the vibration device 2366 is spaced apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swinging member 2360 reciprocally swings due to the reaction of vibration of the vibration device 2366, and the neck The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in such a manner that it swings back and forth between the posture shown in FIG. 28 (a) and the posture P21. Accordingly, before the player grasps the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), and this is referred to as the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20). In this case, it is possible to detect that the player is before gripping the swing operation member 310.

一方、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持すると、その把持の力により中間枠部材312の姿勢が固定され、裏ボタン部材312dが往復動作しなくなるので、第2センサ部材313dに検出される信号のパターンが変化する。この変化を検出することで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した後であることを検出することができる。   On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d The pattern changes. By detecting this change, it can be detected that the player is after holding the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310の把持する際には、発生する反力は存在しないので、遊技者に必要な力は小さい。また、首振り操作部材310に遊技者の手が被さってさえいれば良く(遊技者は即座に首振り操作部材310を操作できる)、例えば、遊技者は手の自重を中間枠部材312にかけておくだけで良いので、遊技者のストレスを低減することができる。   When the swinging operation member 310 is gripped, there is no reaction force that is generated, so the force required for the player is small. Further, it is only necessary that the player's hand is placed on the swing operation member 310 (the player can immediately operate the swing operation member 310). For example, the player places his / her own weight on the intermediate frame member 312. It is only necessary to reduce the player's stress.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持しているかどうか(操作の準備段階にあるかどうか)を、遊技者に押し込みボタンの操作を要求することなく行うことができるので、演出を進めるタイミングを遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したタイミングに設定することができると共に、押し込みボタンの操作を要求することによる遊技者のストレスを解消することができる。   Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not the player is in a preparation stage for the operation) without requiring the player to operate the push button, so that the presentation is advanced. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the player's stress caused by requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

レバー部材2340と首振り部材2360との連結を軸支としたときに、振動装置2366の振動の中心軸と首振り部材2360の回転軸とを一致させることで遊技者側に伝える振動を大きくすることができる。一方で、この場合、パチンコ機10(図1参照)にも大きな振動が伝わってしまう。そのため、締結ネジの緩みや部材の劣化が早い段階で生じて、メンテナンス周期が早まるという問題点があった。   When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swinging member 2360 is a pivotal support, the vibration transmitted to the player is increased by matching the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 with the rotation shaft of the swinging member 2360. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). For this reason, there has been a problem in that the fastening screw is loosened or the member is deteriorated at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り部材2360の回転軸と、振動装置2366の振動の中心軸とをずらすことで、首振り操作部材310を回転させることに振動装置2366の振動を利用することができ、パチンコ機10(図1参照)に伝わる振動を少なくすることができる(振動のエネルギーが首振り操作部材310の回転に使用される)。加えて、振動装置2366の振動により、首振り操作部材310を回転させつつレンズ部材317を振動させることができるので、演出効果を向上させることができる。   On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the center axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366. The vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) can be reduced (vibration energy is used to rotate the swing operation member 310). In addition, the lens member 317 can be vibrated while the swing operation member 310 is rotated by the vibration of the vibration device 2366, so that the effect can be improved.

棒状部材2331dは、偏心カム軸331d2と平行に延設されるロック解除軸2331d5(図28(a)参照)を備える。   The rod-like member 2331d includes a lock releasing shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28A) that extends in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

図29(a)及び図29(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図29(a)では、ロック部材2336が解除側に配置された状態で首振り操作部材310が押し下げられ下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図29(b)では、図29(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図29(a)反時計回り方向)の回転終端まで回転した状態が図示される。   FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and disposed in the downward position with the lock member 2336 disposed on the release side. FIG. 29B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 has rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A to the rotation end in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29A).

首振り操作部材310はねじりバネSP22により後転方向(図29(a)時計回り方向)に付勢されるので、レバー部材2340が揺動範囲の下端に配置されるまでは首振り操作部材310が上部カバー部材344に押し当てられた状態が維持される。   Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) clockwise) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 is placed until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is kept pressed against the upper cover member 344.

レバー部材2340を揺動範囲の下端まで押し下げた状態(図29(a)参照)から、更に首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向に首振り操作部材310に荷重をかけると、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図29(a)反時計回り方向)に回転する。これにより、遊技者に首振り操作部材310の押し下げ操作の下端を認識させることができ、首振り操作部材310の操作範囲の終端が分からず、遊技者が意図せず首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを防止することができる。   From the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29A), when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in a direction to further push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 It rotates in the forward direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). Thus, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player does not intend to overload the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent a load from being applied.

本実施形態では、レバー部材2340に駆動力を伝達する偏心カム部材2333と、ロック部材2336を解除側(図29(a)参照)へ向けて揺動させるロック解除カム部材2339とを、共に駆動ギア335bで回転させる。これにより、第2駆動装置337(図10参照)を配設不要とでき、製品コストを削減することができる。以下、偏心カム部材2333、ロック解除カム部材2339及びロック部材2336について説明する。   In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are both driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) can be dispensed with, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock release cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

図30(a)は、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bの正面図であり、図30(b)は、図30(a)の矢印XXXb方向視におけるカム部材2333bの側面図であり、図30(c)は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aの正面図であり、図30(d)は、図30(c)の矢印XXXd方向視における本体部材2333aの側面図である。なお、図30(c)及び図30(d)では、本体部材2333aが部分的に断面視される。   30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 30C is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30D is a side view of the main body member 2333a as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXd in FIG. In addition, in FIG.30 (c) and FIG.30 (d), the main body member 2333a is partially sectional view.

図30(a)及び図30(b)に示すように、カム部材2333bは、偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に軸支される筒状部2333b1と、その筒状部2333b1に内接する円に沿って軸方向に延設され筒状部2333b1より若干短く形成されると共に内部が中空とされるカム部2333b2と、筒状部2333b1の先端部に軸方向に沿って切り欠かれる一対の切り欠き2333b3と、筒状部2333b1とカム部2333b2とを双方の軸を通る方向で連結する板状のリブ部2333b4と、そのリブ部2333b4から筒状部2333b1の軸心と平行に凸設される凸設部2333b5と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the cam member 2333b includes a cylindrical portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10), and a circle inscribed in the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 that extends in the axial direction along the tube and is slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and is hollow inside, and a pair of cutouts that are cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 A notch 2333b3, a plate-like rib portion 2333b4 that connects the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in a direction passing through both axes, and a protruding projection parallel to the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1 from the rib portion 2333b4. And a projecting portion 2333b5.

凸設部2333b5は、筒状部2333b1から径方向に半径R21の長さだけ離間した位置に配設され本体部材2333aの円環凹部2333a3に挿通される突起であり、磁性体材料から形成され、リブ部2333b4に接着材等で接着される。なお、凸設部2333b5は、筒状部2333b1の径方向と交差する態様で配設される側面(図30(a)上下の側面)が筒状部2333b1を中心とする円形状に沿う曲面形状で形成される。   The protruding portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position spaced apart from the cylindrical portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. The rib portion 2333b4 is bonded with an adhesive or the like. The protruding portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape in which side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30 (a)) arranged in a manner intersecting the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 are in a circular shape centering on the cylindrical portion 2333b1. Formed with.

なお、筒状部2333b1は筒状部333bと、カム部2333b2はカム部333cと、切り欠き2333b3は切り欠き333dと、リブ部2333b4はリブ部333eと、それぞれ対応し、それら対応する部分同士で技術的思想は共通なため、ここでは説明を省略する。   The cylindrical portion 2333b1 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical idea is common, the description is omitted here.

図30(c)及び図30(d)に示すように、本体部材2333aは、中心に偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に軸支される断面円形状の軸孔2333a2が穿設されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335b(図10参照)と歯合されるギア歯が形成される円板形状の円板部2333a1と、その円板部2333a1の正面側から軸孔2333a2の軸心方向に沿って円環状に凹設される円環凹部2333a3と、その円環凹部2333a3の外周面に沿って磁性体材料が円環状に配設される固定磁石部2333a4と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIGS. 30C and 30D, the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section that is pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center. A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. An annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is disposed in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

円環凹部2333a3は、軸孔2333a2の中心から円環凹部2333a3の内周面までの距離が半径R22の長さとされ、径方向の幅が凸設部2333b5の厚みより若干大きくされる。本実施形態では、半径R22は変形R21と等しい長さとされる(半径R21=半径R22)。また、円環凹部2333a3の凹設深さは、凸設部2333b5の凸設長さよりも長くされる。   In the annular recess 2333a3, the distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22, and the radial width is slightly larger than the thickness of the protruding portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 is equal in length to the deformation R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). In addition, the concave depth of the annular concave portion 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

ここで、円環凹部2333a3の外周側に固定磁石部2333a4が配設されるので、凸設部2333b5が筒状部2333b1よりも上方に配設される場合に、レバー部材2340からカム部材2333bが過荷重を受けると、凸設部2333b5を固定磁石部2333a4から逃がす方向にカム部材2333bが荷重を受ける。これにより、凸設部2333b5が固定磁石部2333a4に押し付けられることを防止することができ、磁石同士が擦れることにより劣化することを抑制することができる。   Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the projecting portion 2333b5 is disposed above the cylindrical portion 2333b1, the cam member 2333b is moved from the lever member 2340. When the overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives the load in a direction in which the protruding portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. Thereby, it can prevent that the convex part 2333b5 is pressed against the fixed magnet part 2333a4, and can suppress that it deteriorates by rubbing magnets.

図31は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとを組み立てた図であり、図31(a)は、偏心カム部材2333の正面図であり、図31(b)は図31(a)のXXXIb方向視における偏心カム部材2333の側面図であり、図31(c)は、偏心カム部材2333の正面図である。なお、図31(c)では、図31(a)に示す状態から、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが相対回転された状態が図示される。なお、D12(b)では、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが部分的に断面視される。   FIG. 31 is an assembled view of the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. FIG. 31A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 as viewed in the direction of XXXIb, and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. 31C illustrates a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

図31(a)及び図31(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが偏心カム軸331d2に軸支され組み立てられた状態において、凸設部2333b5が円環凹部2333a3に挿通され、凸設部2333b5と固定磁石部2333a4との間で互いに吸着し合う方向の磁力が働く。そのため、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとは、駆動ギア335b(図10参照)から伝達される駆動力により一体で回転することができる。   As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, in the state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the protruding portion 2333b5 is circular. Magnetic forces in the direction of being attracted to each other between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 are inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate together by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

この際、凸設部2333b5の形状が筒状部2333b1を中心とした円に沿った曲面で形成され、円環凹部2333a3の側面と接触する面積を大きくすることができるので、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとを強固に固定することができる。   At this time, since the shape of the projecting portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centering on the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and the area contacting the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased, the main body member 2333a and the cam The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

一方、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとは磁力で吸着固定されているに過ぎないので、その吸着力以上の力でカム部材2333bが荷重を受けると、本体部材2333aに対してカム部材2333bを滑らせることができる。即ち、図31(a)に示すように、本体部材2333aの基準とする位相を表す基準線Oとカム部材2333bのリブ部2333b4の位相を表す直線Q21とが一致した状態から、本体部材2333aが固定されカム部材2333bに回転方向の荷重が加えられることで、図31(c)に示すように、基準線Oと直線Q21とがずれた状態へと変化させることができる。   On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force greater than the attraction force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is moved from a state in which the reference line O representing the phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By fixing and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be shifted to a state shifted as shown in FIG. 31 (c).

図32(a)は、ロック解除カム部材2339の正面図であり、図32(b)は、図32(a)のXXXIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材2339の底面図であり、図32(c)は、図32(a)のXXXIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材2339の側面図である。   32 (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as viewed in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as viewed in the XXXIIc direction of FIG.

図32に示すように、ロック解除カム部材2339は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aと同一の大きさに形成されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335bと歯合されるギア歯が形成される本体部2339aと、その本体部2339aの中心に穿設されると共にロック解除軸2331d5が挿通される軸孔2339bと、本体部2339aの正面側の側面に沿って径方向外側へ向けて延設されると共にロック部材2336の係止部2666dに当接可能な長さで形成される解除部2339cと、その解除部2339cに対して周方向に90度の位置で径方向外側に延設される検出片2339dと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 32, the unlocking cam member 2339 is formed in the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and has a main body in which gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 335b are formed on the outer peripheral surface. A portion 2339a, a shaft hole 2339b that is drilled in the center of the main body 2339a and through which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and extends radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 2339a. And a release portion 2339c formed with a length capable of coming into contact with the engaging portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. 2339d.

検出片2339dは、図示しない検出センサの隙間を通過する。これにより、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相を検出することができる。   The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap between detection sensors (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be detected.

図33(a)は、ロック部材2336の正面図であり、図33(b)は、図33(a)のXXXIIIb方向視におけるロック部材2336の側面図である。   FIG. 33A is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33B is a side view of the lock member 2336 as viewed in the XXXIIIb direction of FIG.

図33(a)及び図33(b)に示すように、ロック部材2336は、ギア部336d(図10参照)が省略された形状とされる。ロック部材2336は、レバー部材2340の揺動を防止する部材であって、先端側が略L字の鉤状に形成される板形状の本体部2336aと、その本体部2336aの基端側に穿設されると共にロック軸331d3(図10参照)が挿通される軸支孔2336bと、その軸支孔2336bを中心とした円弧に沿って形成される案内孔2336cと、本体部2336aのロック解除カム部材2339と対向する側(図33(b)左側)の側面から軸支孔2336bの上方(L字の鉤状の部分の先端)において凸出される係止部2336dと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and has a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a that is formed in a substantially L-shaped bowl shape on the distal end side, and is drilled on the proximal end side of the main body portion 2336a. And a shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and a lock release cam member of the main body 2336a And a locking portion 2336d that protrudes from the side of the side facing 2339 (the left side in FIG. 33B) above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped bowl-shaped portion).

本体部2336aは、L字の鉤状に形成される先端部の側面(レバー部材2340の下側から当接する側面)が、レバー部材2340と当接する際にロック部材2336を回転させる力が大きくなる態様とされる。   The main body 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion formed in an L-shaped bowl shape (the side surface contacting from the lower side of the lever member 2340) contacts the lever member 2340. It is considered as an embodiment.

案内孔2336cは、補助軸331d4(図10参照)が挿通される長孔であり、この案内孔2336cの長さにより、ロック部材2336の揺動終端を規定することができる。   The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the swing end of the lock member 2336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 2336c.

係止部2336cは、ロック解除カム部材2339(図32参照)の解除部2339cから押される部分である。また、係止部2336cにねじりバネ(図示せず)が係止され、ロック部材2336は終始、固定側(図28(a)参照)へ向けて付勢力を受ける。   The locking portion 2336c is a portion that is pushed from the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the lock member 2336 receives a biasing force from the beginning toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A).

図34及び図35は、駆動ギア335bが回転することによりレバー部材2340が揺動することを時系列で図示するレバー部材2340、偏心カム部材2333、ロック部材2336及びロック解除カム部材2339の正面図である。   34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the lock release cam member 2339 illustrating in time series that the lever member 2340 swings as the drive gear 335b rotates. It is.

なお、図34(a)では、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図34(b)では、図34(a)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336に当接するまで回転された状態が図示され、図34(c)では、図34(b)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336を解除側に揺動させた状態が図示され、図34(d)では、図34(c)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339が回転されロック部材2336が固定側の位置に復帰した状態が図示される。   34A shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and in FIG. 34B, the lock release cam member 2339 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 34A. FIG. 34C shows a state in which the lock member 2336 is rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336. FIG. 34C shows a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 to the release side from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 34 (d), a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position is shown.

また、図35(a)では、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bが、筒状部2333b1の反対側(180度の角度で配置される側)の側面でレバー部材2340と当接する状態が図示され、図35(b)では、図35(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が回転されレバー部材2340がロック部材2336に上側から当接した状態が図示され、図35(c)では、図35(b)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が回転されレバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制される状態が図示される。   FIG. 35A shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 is in contact with the lever member 2340 on the side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion 2333b1 (side disposed at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the state shown in FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is illustrated.

図34(a)に示すように、ロック解除カム部材2339の解除部2339cがロック部材2336の係止部に当接するまでに角度θ21だけ回転する必要がある場合、ロック解除カム部材2339が角度θ21だけ回転して図34(b)に示す状態に至るまでの間は、レバー部材2340が揺動を規制されるので、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bが回転することができない。そのため、ロック解除カム部材2339と同期して回転する本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが、図34(a)に示す状態から角度θ21だけ相対回転する(図34(b)参照)。   As shown in FIG. 34A, when the unlocking cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 until it comes into contact with the locking portion of the lock member 2336, the unlocking cam member 2339 has an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is prevented from swinging until the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) is rotated, the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the lock release cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

このように、カム部材2333bを本体部材2333aと相対回転可能としているので、偏心カム部材2333とロック解除カム部材2339との位相がずれて組み立てられた場合でも、偏心カム部材2333の回転がレバー部材2340にせき止められて、駆動モータ335a(図10参照)が損傷することを防止することができる。   Thus, since the cam member 2333b can be rotated relative to the main body member 2333a, even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocking cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is the lever member. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by 2340.

ロック解除カム部材2339が角度θ21だけ回転した後は、ロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336を解除側に移動させ始めることで、レバー部材2340の揺動の規制が解けるので、偏心カム部材2333の回転により、レバー部材2340が揺動する。この場合、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが磁力で吸着され、一体で回転する。   After the lock release cam member 2339 rotates by the angle θ21, the lock release cam member 2339 starts moving the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released. The lever member 2340 is swung by the rotation. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by magnetic force and rotate integrally.

ロック解除カム部材2339の解除部2339cがロック部材2336の上方へ抜けて、ロック部材2336が固定側に復帰すると(図34(d)参照)、その後タイミングに関わらず、レバー部材2340の後端部(図34(a)右端部)がロック部材2336の本体部2336aの鉤状部分の曲面部を押すことでロック部材2336が解除側へ押しやられ、さらにレバー部材2340の後端部が下がることで、自然に揺動が規制される。   When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 comes out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34D), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 regardless of the timing thereafter. (FIG. 34 (a) right end portion) pushes the curved surface portion of the hook-shaped portion of the main body portion 2336a of the lock member 2336, thereby pushing the lock member 2336 to the release side and further lowering the rear end portion of the lever member 2340. Naturally swinging is regulated.

そのため、例えば、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる方向に操作し、レバー部材2340の後端部が下降する場合、レバー部材2340の姿勢に関わらず(レバー部材2340が図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)のどの姿勢をとっている場合でも)レバー部材2340がロック部材2336の鉤状部分の下側まで揺動されることで揺動が規制される。   Therefore, for example, when the player operates in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is positioned regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (FIG. 34 (d), The swing of the lever member 2340 is controlled to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture of FIG. 35A or FIG. 35B).

ここで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げ操作する際に偏心カム部材2333にかかる荷重に対する対策として、偏心カム部材2333をゴムなどの弾性材料から形成し、部材が弾性変形することで荷重を逃がすという方法が考えられる。しかし、この場合、部材にへたりが生じたり、形状が変化したりするという問題点があった。   Here, as a countermeasure against a load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and swings the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed of an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming can be considered. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is sagged or the shape is changed.

これに対し、本実施形態では、カム部材2333bは本体部材2333aに対して滑ることができるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げることで偏心カム部材2333に与えられる荷重によってカム部材2333bが破損することを防止することができる。   On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). Therefore, the cam member 2333b can be prevented from being damaged.

即ち、レバー部材2340の姿勢に関わらず(レバー部材2340が図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)のどの姿勢をとっている場合でも)、首振り操作部材310(図28参照)に上向きの荷重がかけられることで、レバー部材2340がカム部材2333bを押しやり(本体部材2333aに対して滑らせ)、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336の鉤状部分の下側まで揺動されることで揺動が規制される。   That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 shown in FIG. 34D, FIG. 35A, or FIG. 35B), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. 28)), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slids with respect to the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Oscillation is regulated by being moved.

一方で、この場合、カム部材2333bの姿勢は同じ(図35(c)参照)であるのに、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相は異なる事態が生じる(図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)参照)。そのため、再度、ロック解除カム部材2339でロック部材2336を解除側へ移動させるまでに必要な駆動ギア335bの回転角度が異なり、レバー部材2340の駆動開始のタイミングを定めることが困難になるという問題点があった。   On the other hand, in this case, the cam member 2333b has the same posture (see FIG. 35C), but the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 is different (FIGS. 34D and 35A). Or refer to FIG. Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required until the lock member 2336 is moved to the release side again by the lock release cam member 2339 is different, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相を検出センサ(図示せず)で検出することで、偏心カム部材2333とロック解除カム部材2339との位相を合わせることができる。即ち、ロック部材2336にレバー部材2340が揺動を規制されている場合のカム部材2333bの配置は図35(c)に示す配置に固定されるので、この状態で駆動ギア335bを回転させてロック解除カム部材2339を所定の位相(図34(b)参照)まで回転させることで、偏心カム部材2333の位相とロック解除カム部材2339の位相とを合わせることができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げ操作するタイミングに関わらず、偏心カム部材2333の位相とロック解除カム部材2339の位相とを合わせることができ、レバー部材2340の駆動開始のタイミングを容易に一致させることができる。   Accordingly, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing at which the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). The drive start timing can be easily matched.

次いで、図36を参照して、首振り部材2360の本体部材2361について説明する。図36(a)から図36(c)は、軸支棒363の軸方向視で図示した首振り部材2360の本体部材2361の正面図である。なお、図36(a)では、後転側の終端に本体部材2361が揺動配置された状態(図28(a)参照)が図示され、図36(b)では、前転側の終端に本体部材2361が揺動配置された状態(図28(b)参照)が図示され、図36(c)では、図36(b)に示す状態から本体部材2361が長孔2361fの長手方向に沿ってスライド移動された状態が図示される。   Next, the main body member 2361 of the swinging member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swinging member 2360 shown in the axial view of the shaft support bar 363. FIG. 36A shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated and arranged at the end on the reverse side (see FIG. 28A), and FIG. 36B shows the state on the end on the forward side. A state (see FIG. 28B) in which the main body member 2361 is arranged in a swinging manner is illustrated. In FIG. 36C, the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. The state of being slid and moved is shown.

図36に示すように、本体部材2361は、軸孔341e(図12参照)と同軸で軸支棒363に軸支される部材であって、側壁部361a(図12参照)の形状が若干変形されて形成される変形側壁部2361aと、軸孔361cから固定板部361eの延設方向に沿って形成される長孔2361fと、角度規制孔361dの上側端部から固定板部361eの延設方向に沿って形成される長孔2361gと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 36, the body member 2361 is a member that is coaxially supported by the shaft support bar 363 and coaxial with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a is formed, the long hole 2361f is formed along the extending direction of the fixed plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c, and the fixed plate portion 361e is extended from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. And a long hole 2361g formed along the direction.

これにより、少なくとも本体部材2361が前転側の終端に揺動配置されない限り、軸支棒363および規制棒365が長孔2361f,2361gに侵入しないように配設される。そのため、本体部材2361は軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作のみを行う。   As a result, the shaft support bar 363 and the regulation bar 365 are arranged so as not to enter the long holes 2361f and 2361g unless at least the main body member 2361 is swingably arranged at the terminal end on the forward rotation side. Therefore, the main body member 2361 performs only a swinging motion around the shaft support rod 363.

次いで、図37を参照して、モータ固定板2362について説明する。図37(a)は、モータ固定板2362の上面図であり、図37(b)は、図37(a)のXXXVIIb方向視におけるモータ固定板2362の側面図であり、図37(c)は、図37(b)に示す状態からU字状部材2362dがスライド移動された状態を示すモータ固定板2362の側面図である。なお、理解を容易にするために、図37(b)及び図37(c)において、本体部材2361の外形が想像線で図示される。   Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. FIG. 38 is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing a state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c), the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

図37に示すように、モータ固定板2362は、本体部362a及び側壁部362bが後方(図37上方)に延長された形状で形成される本体部2362a及び側壁部2362bと、本体部2362aの底側から下方へ延設される一対の棒状部2362cと、それら棒状部2362cにスライド移動可能に配設され長孔2361f,2361gの幅よりも大きな股幅で形成されるU字状部材2362dと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upward in FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-like portions 2362c extending downward from the side, a U-shaped member 2362d formed on the rod-like portion 2362c so as to be slidable and formed with a crotch width larger than the width of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, Is mainly provided.

側壁部2362bは、本体部2362aの延設方向に沿って穿設される長孔2362b1を備える。   The side wall portion 2362b includes a long hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

U字状部材2362dは、U字の股幅の方向が長孔2361f,2361gの幅方向に沿う態様で配設され、弾性バネ等(図示せず)により本体部2362aから離反する方向に付勢される。即ち、U字状部材2362dに荷重がかけられていない場合は、U字状部材2362dは図37(b)に示す位置に配置され、U字の脚の部分が長孔2361f,2361gと重なるので、軸支棒363及び規制棒365が長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動することを防止できる。   The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged such that the direction of the U-shaped crotch width is along the width direction of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, and is biased in a direction away from the main body 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Is done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is disposed at the position shown in FIG. The shaft support bar 363 and the regulation bar 365 can be prevented from moving along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

一方で、U字状部材2362dに本体部2362aへ近接する方向へ向けた荷重がかけられると、U字状部材2362dは図37(c)に示す位置に配置され、U字の股の部分が長孔2361f,2361gと重なるので、軸支棒363及び規制棒365を長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動させることができる。   On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is disposed at the position shown in FIG. Since it overlaps with the long holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support bar 363 and the regulating bar 365 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

即ち、U字状部材2362dに荷重をかけるか否かを切り替えることで、本体部材2361を長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動可能とするか否かを切り替えることができる。   That is, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d.

ここで、U字状部材2362dをスライド移動させる部材について説明する。本実施形態では、レバー部材2340の本体部材341の内側に長手方向に沿ってスライド移動可能に配設される板状の第1解除部材2370と、首振り操作部材310の背面側枠部材311に配設される貫通孔を貫通して本体部2362aの延設方向と垂直な方向にスライド移動可能に配設される板状の第2解除部材2380と、を主に備える。   Here, a member for sliding the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-like first release member 2370 that is slidably moved along the longitudinal direction inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 and the rear side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310 are provided. It mainly includes a plate-like second release member 2380 that is disposed so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the disposed through hole.

なお、第1解除部材2370は後側(図28(a)右側)のU字状部材2362dをスライド移動可能に配設され、第2解除部材2380は前側(図28(a)左側)のU字状部材2362dをスライド移動可能に配設される。   The first release member 2370 is slidably disposed on the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28A), and the second release member 2380 is disposed on the U side on the front side (left side in FIG. 28A). The character-shaped member 2362d is arranged to be slidable.

また、第1解除部材2370は、剥離部材350がレバー部材2340から引きはがされることで、本体部材351が第1解除部材2370の端部に当接し、U字状部材2362dを押進する形状とされる。第2解除部材2380は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置され、首振り部材2360が回転し前転方向の揺動終端に配置されることで、前カバー321が第2解除部材2380の端部に当接し、U字状部材2362dを押進する形状とされる。   Further, the first release member 2370 has the main body member 351 abuts against the end of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d when the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the lever member 2340. Shaped. The second release member 2380 is configured such that the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and the swing member 2360 is rotated and disposed at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is disposed on the second release member 2380. The U-shaped member 2362d is pushed and abutted on the end portion.

例えば、図29(b)に示す状態では、は前側(図29(a)左側)のU字状部材2362dはスライド移動されるが、後側(図29(a)右側)のU字状部材2362dはスライド移動していないので、首振り操作部材310を下方にスライド移動させることはできない。   For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29B, the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29A) is slid, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29A). Since 2362d is not slid, the swing operation member 310 cannot be slid downward.

図38(a)及び図38(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図38(a)では、図28(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が押し下げられ下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図38(b)では、図38(a)に示す状態から、首振り操作部材310が長孔2361f,2361gに沿ってスライド移動された状態が図示される。   38A and 38B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 38A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 38B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g from the state illustrated in FIG.

図38(a)に示すように、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされ、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されると共に回転され前転方向の揺動終端に配置されることで、一対のU字状部材2362dがスライド移動され、首振り操作部材310が長孔2361f,2361gに沿ってスライド移動することが可能となる。   As shown in FIG. 38A, the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, and the swinging operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position and is rotated and disposed at the end of swinging in the forward rotation direction. Thus, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and the swing operation member 310 can be slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

このとき、レバー部材2340の本体部材341が剥離部材350が引きはがされることで首振り操作部材310に既に過荷重がかかっており、首振り操作部材310が揺動範囲の下端まで揺動したうえ、更に首振り操作部材310に下向きの力が掛かっている。そのため、遊技者が、首振り操作部材310を操作する際に誤って過荷重をかけてしまったわけではなく、操作と関係無く、首振り操作部材310を破壊しにかかっていると判断することができる。   At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swinging operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, the player does not accidentally overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and may determine that the swing operation member 310 is about to be destroyed regardless of the operation. it can.

そのため、例えば、図38(b)に示す状態となったことを検出センサ(図示せず)で検出し、警報を出すことで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを抑制し、操作デバイス2300が破壊されることを防止することができる。   Therefore, for example, a detection sensor (not shown) detects that the state shown in FIG. 38B has been reached, and an alarm is issued, thereby preventing the player from overloading the swing operation member 310. Thus, the operation device 2300 can be prevented from being destroyed.

なお、首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけない場合には、首振り操作部材310がスライド移動することを防止することができるので、長孔2361f,2361gによって首振り操作部材310の操作感が変化することを防止することができる。   In addition, when an overload is not applied to the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 can be prevented from sliding, so that the operation feeling of the swing operation member 310 is provided by the long holes 2361f and 2361g. It is possible to prevent the change.

次いで、図39から図42を参照して、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300について説明する。第1実施形態では、レバー部材340を駆動させる駆動力がレバー部材340にレバー支持軸331d1の後方で伝達される場合を説明したが、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、レバー部材3340を駆動させる駆動力がレバー支持軸331d1の前方で伝達される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described. However, the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be transmitted is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

なお、第3実施形態では、ねじりバネSP31からレバー部材3340を前倒れさせる方向に付勢力が働くとともに、ねじりバネSP32から首振り操作部材310を後倒れさせる方向に付勢力が働く。   In the third embodiment, a biasing force acts in a direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward from the torsion spring SP31, and a biasing force acts in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 is tilted backward from the torsion spring SP32.

ねじりバネSP31は、軸支部331g,332g(図10参照)に巻き付けられ、一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332h(図10参照)に上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に上側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材340は首振り操作部材310が前倒れする方向に付勢される。   The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts on the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from the upper side, and the other end to the angle regulating rod member 346. It abuts from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is tilted forward.

ねじりバネSP32は、緩衝部材364に巻き付け支持され、一方の端部が正面曲面部345cに係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP32により、首振り部材360が、本体部材341に対して起き上がる方向に付勢される。   The torsion spring SP32 is wound around and supported by the buffer member 364, and one end is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swinging member 360 in the direction in which it rises with respect to the main body member 341.

図39(a)及び図39(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図39(a)及び図39(b)では、レバー部材3340がロック部材336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図39(b)では図39(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に前方に首振り操作された状態が図示される。本実施形態では、図39(a)の状態が初期位置とされる。また、図17(a)では操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は同じなので、操作デバイス3300とみなして説明を行う。以下、本実施形態において同様である。   FIGS. 39A and 39B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 39 (a) and 39 (b) show a state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336, and FIG. 39 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state where the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 17A, the operation device 300 is illustrated, but since the appearance is the same, the operation device 3300 is regarded as being described. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図39に示すように、本実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、偏心カム部材333を備えておらず、レバー部材3340の駆動は後述するソレノイド機構により行われる。以下、そのソレノイド機構について説明する。   As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in this embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. Hereinafter, the solenoid mechanism will be described.

ソレノイド機構は、内側カバー部材3330の内側に配設される磁性体材料から形成される磁性体部材3339と、レバー部材3340に固定されると共に円柱形状で金属製の棒状部材3345fとで構成される。   The solenoid mechanism includes a magnetic member 3339 formed of a magnetic material disposed inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical rod-shaped metal member 3345f that is fixed to the lever member 3340 and is made of a cylinder. .

レバー部材3340の下部カバー部材3345は、背面ガイド部345aの左右端部から後下方に延設されると共に下部カバー部材3345と一体で成型される一対の伝達部3345eを備え、その伝達部3345eの先端にレバー支持軸331d1と平行な姿勢で金属製の棒状部材3345fが固定され、その棒状部材3345fには電流が導通される。   The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e that extend rearward and downward from the left and right ends of the back guide portion 345a and are molded integrally with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and a current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

磁性体材料3339は、内側カバー部材3330の正面側壁から背面側(図39(a)右側)に上下一対で延設されるU字形状の磁石である。本実施形態では、上側に配置される上側腕部3339nがN極とされ、下側に配置される下側腕部3339sがS極とされる。上側腕部3339nの下側面および下側腕部3339sの上側面は、レバー部材3340の揺動に伴って棒状部材3345fが移動する軌跡から上下方向に若干隙間をあけて配置される。そのため、レバー部材3340が揺動する際に、棒状部材3345fが磁性体部材3339と衝突することを抑制することができる。   The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending from the front side wall of the inner cover member 3330 to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) in a pair. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n disposed on the upper side is an N pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s disposed on the lower side is an S pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight gap in the vertical direction from the trajectory in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, when the lever member 3340 is swung, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339.

ここで、例えば、棒状部材3345fに、図39(a)紙面手前側へ向けて電流を流すと、棒状部材3345fを後方(図39(a)右方)へ向けて移動させる電磁力が生じる。また逆方向に電流を流すと、棒状部材3345fを前方(図39(a)左方)へ向けて移動させる電磁力が生じる。これら電磁力により、レバー部材3340を揺動させることができる。   Here, for example, when a current is passed through the bar-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of FIG. 39A, an electromagnetic force that moves the bar-shaped member 3345f rearward (to the right of FIG. 39A) is generated. When a current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (leftward in FIG. 39A) is generated. The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

図40(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図40(a)では、ロック部材336が解除側に配置され、レバー部材3340が付勢力により揺動され首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。   FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is disposed on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position.

本実施形態では、レバー部材3340がねじりバネSP1により前倒れする方向に付勢されるので、ロック部材336を解除側に配置することでレバー部材3340を揺動開始させることができる。   In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is biased in the forward tilting direction by the torsion spring SP1, the lever member 3340 can start to swing by disposing the lock member 336 on the release side.

本実施形態のように、レバー部材3340が前倒れする方向に付勢されると、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げた場合にレバー部材3340が近接する側にレバー部材3340を駆動させる偏心カム部材を配置する必要があり、遊技者の操作により偏心カム部材が破損しやすいという問題点があった。   When the lever member 3340 is biased in the forward tilt direction as in the present embodiment, when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, the lever member 3340 drives the lever member 3340 to the side closer to it. There is a problem that it is necessary to dispose the cam member, and the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the player's operation.

一方、本実施形態では偏心カム部材を削除し、ソレノイド機構によりレバー部材3340に駆動力を伝達する。ソレノイド機構を構成する棒状部材3345fの移動軌跡と若干隙間を空ける態様で、ソレノイド機構を構成する磁性体部材3339が配設されるので、棒状部材3345fと磁性体部材3339とが衝突することが抑制され、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げ操作した場合に、ソレノイド機構が破損することを抑制することができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by a solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is disposed in a manner that leaves a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, it is possible to prevent the rod-like member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 from colliding with each other. Then, when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, the solenoid mechanism can be prevented from being damaged.

図40(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図40(b)では、図39(b)に示す状態から、首振り操作部材310が下方に押し下げられ、本体部材341と剥離部材350とが引きはがされた状態が図示される。   FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 40B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 39B and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off.

ねじりバネSP1の付勢力は、レバー部材3340を前倒れさせる方向(図40(b)反時計回り方向)に向けられるので、図40(b)の状態から遊技者が手を離しても、首振り操作部材310はすぐに上昇移動することは無く、その場に維持される。   Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), even if the player releases the hand from the state of FIG. The swing operation member 310 does not move up immediately and is maintained on the spot.

ここで、レバー部材340の付勢の方向を起き上がる方向とすると、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけた場合に、レバー部材340が剥離部材350と剥離してロック部材336の破損を防止できたとしても、遊技者が手を離すとすぐに首振り操作部材310が上昇するので、遊技者が過荷重をかけていることに気付かず、首振り操作部材310に繰り返し過荷重をかける恐れがあるという問題点があった。   Here, assuming that the direction of urging the lever member 340 is a rising direction, the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged when the player overloads the swing operation member 310. Even if the player can release the swinging operation member 310 as soon as the player releases his / her hand, the player does not realize that the player is overloading, and the swinging operation member 310 is repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was a risk of applying.

これに対し、本実施形態では、レバー部材3340の付勢の方向がレバー部材3340を前倒れされる方向(図40(b)反時計回り方向)に向けられるので、首振り操作部材310を下向き位置に配置させ続けることができる。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重を繰り返しかける事態を回避することができる。   On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. Can continue to be placed in position. Thereby, the situation where a player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 can be avoided.

本実施形態では、レバー部材3340を駆動させる電磁力を受ける棒状部材3345fが本体部材341と一体で動作する。即ち、本体部材341が剥離部材350と分離した状態において、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けることで本体部材341を揺動させることができる。   In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force that drives the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. In other words, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by the bar-shaped member 3345f receiving electromagnetic force.

ここで、レバー部材340(図10参照)に偏心カム部材333(図10参照)で駆動力を伝達する場合、偏心カム部材333を剥離部材350の下方に配設すると、ロック部材336によりレバー部材340の揺動が規制される場合に、偏心カム部材333の回転も同時に規制される(図18(a)参照)。そのため、ロック部材336によりレバー部材340の揺動が規制される場合に、偏心カム部材333が動作すると、ロック部材336に荷重がかかりロック部材336が損傷する恐れがあるという問題点があった。   Here, when a driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), if the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 causes the lever member to move. When the swinging of 340 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also restricted simultaneously (see FIG. 18A). For this reason, there is a problem in that if the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材336によりレバー部材3340の揺動が規制される場合に、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けて移動することで、本体部材341が揺動可能とされる一方、剥離部材350には駆動力が伝達されない。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f is moved by receiving electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

そのため、ロック部材336によりレバー部材3340の揺動が規制される場合に棒状部材3345fに電流が流れたとしても、その際生じる電磁力は本体部材341の揺動に使用され、剥離部材350の揺動には使用されないので、ロック部材336が損傷することを防止することができる。   Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for the rocking of the main body member 341, and the rocking of the peeling member 350 Since it is not used for movement, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

図41(a)及び図41(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図41(a)では、図40(b)に示す状態から、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動された状態が図示され、図41(b)では、図41(a)に示す状態から、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動された状態が図示される。   41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 41A shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the direction in which it rises from the state shown in FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B shows the state shown in FIG. From this, a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is shown.

図41(a)及び図41(b)に示すように、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けて移動することにより、レバー部材3340の本体部材341を揺動させることができる。ここで、剥離部材350の下方に偏心カム部材333(図10参照)を配置し、その偏心カム部材333を回転させることでレバー部材3340を駆動させる場合には、剥離部材350からレバー部材340の本体部材341が引きはがされた状態(図23(b)参照)で本体部材341を駆動させることはできない。   As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung by the rod-shaped member 3345f being moved by receiving electromagnetic force. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is disposed below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 is moved from the peeling member 350. The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

これに対し、本実施形態では、剥離部材350を介して本体部材341に駆動力が伝達されるのではなく、棒状部材3345fが受ける電磁力が伝達部3345eを介して本体部材341に伝達され、本体部材341が駆動される。従って、剥離部材350の位置が固定されている場合でも、本体部材341を揺動させることができる。   In contrast, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

図40(b)に示す状態から伝達部3345eが角度α31だけ姿勢変化するまで棒状部材3345fに図40(b)紙面奥側へ向けて電流を流すことで、本体部材341を図41(a)に示す状態とすることができ、図41(a)に示す状態から伝達部3345eが角度α32だけ姿勢変化するまで棒状部材3345fに図41(a)紙面奥側へ向けて電流を流すことで、本体部材341を図41(b)に示す状態とすることができる。   A current is passed through the rod-like member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 40B toward the back side of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a), the current flows from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the rod-like member 3345f toward the back side of FIG. 41 (a) until the transmitting portion 3345e changes its posture by an angle α32. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG.

棒状部材3345fに流す電流の向きを反転させることで、本体部材341の姿勢を、図41(a)の状態と図41(b)の状態とに繰り返し変化させることができる。これにより、遊技者に操作デバイス3300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。   By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state shown in FIG. 41A and the state shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to perform a rolling operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

また、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着固定された状態(図40(a)参照)においても、棒状部材3345fに流す電流の向きを反転させることで、遊技者に操作デバイス3300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。この際に、棒状部材3345fが移動する経路は本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態の経路と同様なので、単一の磁性体部材3339で、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた場合と本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着している場合とに対応することができる。   In addition, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40A), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed so that the player can pay attention to the operation device 3300. The action can be performed. At this time, the path along which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the single magnetic member 3339 is used to pull the peeling member 350 from the main body member 341. This can correspond to the case where the peeling member 350 is adsorbed to the main body member 341.

なお、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着している状態と、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態とでは、本隊部材341の長手方向における重量バランスが変化するため、同じ強さの電流を流したとしても、煽り動作の速度を異ならせることができる。これにより、演出効果を向上させることができる。   The weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is adsorbed on the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if the current is supplied, the speed of the turning operation can be varied. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

図42(a)及び図42(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図42(a)及び図42(b)では、理解を容易とするために首振り操作部材310が断面視されずに側面視で図示され、遊技者の手が想像線で図示される。   42A and 42B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 42 (a) and 42 (b), for easy understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without a cross-sectional view, and a player's hand is shown in an imaginary line. .

図42(a)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置され、遊技者の手が首振り操作部材310の背面側(図42(a)右側)から被せられた状態が図示される。この状態から、棒状部材3345fに図42(a)紙面奥へ向けて電流が流れることで棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受け、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動される。このレバー部材3340の揺動により、首振り操作部材310が遊技者の手に引っ掛かり、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図42(a)反時計回り)に揺動する。これにより、裏ボタン部材312dの状態が変化し、それを第2センサ部材313d(図20参照)で検出することで、遊技者からの入力動作の有無を判断することができる。   FIG. 42A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side of the swing operation member 310 (right side in FIG. 42A). From this state, when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of FIG. 42A, the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and swings in a direction in which the lever member 3340 rises. By swinging the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught by the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Thereby, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and it can be determined by the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20) whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

この場合、遊技者は首振り操作部材310に手を被せているだけで、入力操作を行うことができ、入力操作を容易とすることができる。また、棒状部材3345fに電流を流す態様(タイミングや強さ)によって裏ボタン部材312dの状態が変化する(遊技者が手を被せている首振り操作部材310が前転方向に揺動する)タイミングを制御できる。そのため、遊技者に入力操作を求めることなく、手を首振り操作部材310に被せさせておき、棒状部材3345fに流れる電流の向きや強さを制御することで、制御側で裏ボタン312dの入力操作のタイミングを決定することができる。これにより、例えば、タイミング良く入力をすることを求める演出を行う場合に、遊技者の負担を減少させることができる。   In this case, the player can perform the input operation only by placing his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. In addition, the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) of flowing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the swing operation member 310 on which the player is covering swings in the forward direction). Can be controlled. Therefore, the input of the back button 312d is controlled on the control side by controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f by placing the hand on the swing operation member 310 without requiring the player to perform an input operation. The timing of the operation can be determined. Thereby, for example, when performing an effect that requires input in a timely manner, the burden on the player can be reduced.

また、遊技者が首振り操作部材310の背面側に手を被せることなく、例えば、レンズ部材317に手を置いているだけでは、図42(a)に示す状態からレバー部材3340を起き上がる方向に揺動させても、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図42(a)反時計回り)に揺動することは無い。そのため、操作デバイス3300の操作の態様が複数存在する場合に、タイミング良く入力をするための操作の方法を指定することができ、遊技者に適切な方法で操作デバイス3300を操作させることができる。   Further, for example, if the player places his / her hand on the lens member 317 without placing his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. Even if it swings, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42 (a)). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, an operation method for inputting with good timing can be designated, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

これは、レバー部材3340のレバー支持軸331d1の後下方に偏心カム部材333を配設する形態では不可能であり、例えば、本実施形態のように、レバー支持軸331d1の前側において棒状部材3345hが受ける電磁力が伝達され、本体部材341を起き上がる方向に揺動させる形態を採用することで、初めて達成される効果である。   This is not possible with the configuration in which the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is disposed on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a configuration in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

次いで、図43から図52を参照して、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300について説明する。第1実施形態では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材336がレバー部材340の揺動を規制する場合を説明したが、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材4336がレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 restricts the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position has been described. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is The lock member 4336 restricts the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図43は、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図43では、外側ケース部材320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材4330が分解された状態が図示される。   FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the outer case member 320 is not shown and the inner case member 4330 is disassembled.

図43に示すように、内側ケース部材4330は、レバー部材4340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材4331及び右カバー部材4332と、左カバー部材4331から凸設される偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材4333と、左カバー部材331から凸設されるロック軸4331d3に軸支されるロック部材4336と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態における駆動部材挿通孔332d及び第2駆動装置337は、その配置および姿勢が第1実施形態とは若干異なるが、ロック部材4336を駆動させるという技術的思想は第1実施形態と同様であるので、同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is disposed on the inside, and an eccentric cam projecting from the left cover member 4331. An eccentric cam member 4333 that is pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 that is pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 that protrudes from the left cover member 331 are mainly provided. The drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from the first embodiment in the arrangement and posture, but the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is different from that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

左カバー部材4331は、第1実施形態における左カバー部材331と異なり、上側側壁部331bから右方に凸設され円柱形状に形成される複数の棒状部材4331dを備える。   Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-like members 4331d that are formed to protrude rightward from the upper side wall portion 331b and have a cylindrical shape.

棒状部材4331dは、左カバー部材4331の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1と、そのレバー支持軸331d1の下方に配設される偏心カム軸331d2と、その偏心カム軸331d2の後方に配設されるロック軸4331d3と、を主に備える。   The rod-shaped member 4331d is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the top of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. And a lock shaft 4331d3.

ロック軸4331d3は、ロック部材4336が挿通される軸であって、左カバー部材4331及び右カバー部材4332に両持ちで支持される。   The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 in both ends.

偏心カム部材4333は、第1実施形態における左カバー部材331と異なり、カム部4333cを備える。カム部4333cは、カム部333cと同様の構成とされるが、カム部333cに比較して、偏心カムの直径が大きく形成される。詳細には、カム部4333cの端部が本体部333aの軸心と合わせられ、カム部4333cの最大径部分がレバー部材4340に最接近した状態で、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置される大きさに、偏心カムの直径が形成される。   Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is larger than that of the cam portion 333c. More specifically, the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position in a state where the end of the cam portion 4333c is aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c is closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to a certain size.

ロック部材4336は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置付近に配置され、レバー部材4340のロック受け部材4350が配設される側が上方に配置された状態で、ロック受け部材4350に対して下側から当接し、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制する部材である。   The lock member 4336 is arranged from the lower side with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the vicinity of the downward position and the side on which the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340 is disposed upward. It is a member that abuts and restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340.

図44(a)は、ロック部材4336の正面図であり、図44(b)は、図44(a)のXXXXIVb方向視におけるロック部材4336の側面図である。   44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 as viewed in the XXXIVb direction of FIG. 44 (a).

ロック部材4336は、長尺板状に形成される本体部材4336aと、断面扇型の板形状に形成されると共に第2駆動装置337の駆動力がギアの歯合により伝達される伝達部材4336bと、を主に備える。   The lock member 4336 has a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped plate shape and a driving force of the second driving device 337 transmitted by gear engagement. Is mainly provided.

本体部材4336aは、長尺板状に形成される本体部4336a1と、その本体部4336a1の左右方向(図44(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔4336a2と、本体部4336a1の伝達部材4336bと反対側の側面から軸支孔4336a2の上方において凸出される係止部4336a3と、本体部4336a1の伝達部材4336bと対向する側の側面で軸支孔4336a2の下方において背面側(図44(b)右側)から正面側に凹設される凹設部4336a4と、を主に備える。   The main body member 4336a is formed in a main body portion 4336a1 formed in a long plate shape, and in the left-right direction (FIG. 44 (a) left-right direction) of the main body portion 4336a1, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Shaft support hole 4336a2, a locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface opposite to the transmission member 4336b of the main body portion 4336a1, and a side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. And a recessed portion 4336a4 that is recessed from the back side (right side of FIG. 44B) to the front side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

係止部4336a3は、ロック軸4331d3に固定され一方の腕部が連結側壁部331cに係止されるねじりバネSP41の他方の腕部が係止される部分である(図45参照)。これにより、本体部材4336aは常時、図44(b)反時計回りに付勢される。   The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion where the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c (see FIG. 45). Thereby, the main body member 4336a is always urged counterclockwise in FIG.

凹設部4336a4は、伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4と当接される部分である。凹設部4336aの背面側からの深さが伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4の厚み以上とされることにより、本体部材4336aをロック待機状態(図45(a)参照)にする際の本体部材4336aの姿勢を本体部材4336aと連結側壁部331cとの関係(本体部材4336aが連結側壁部331cに当接された状態で姿勢保持すること)から規定することができる。   The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion that comes into contact with the protruding portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. When the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the protruding portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member when the main body member 4336a is in the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A) The posture of 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (maintaining the posture while the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

伝達部材4336bは、断面扇型に形成され曲面部に駆動ギア337bに歯合されるギア部が形成される本体部4336b1と、その本体部4336b1の左右方向(図44(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔4336b2と、図示しないセンサ部材の隙間を通り伝達部材4336bの姿勢を検出可能とする板状の検出片4336b3と、本体部4336b1の本体部材4336aと対向する側の側面から凸設されると共に本体部4336b1の揺動方向で凹設部4336a4と当接される凸設部4336b4と、を主に備える。   The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a sector fan shape and formed with a gear portion engaged with the drive gear 337b on the curved surface portion, and in the left-right direction of the main body portion 4336b1 (FIG. 44 (a) left-right direction). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the attitude of the transmission member 4336b through a gap between sensor members (not shown), and a main body And a convex portion 4336b4 that is convex from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 facing the main body member 4336a and that abuts against the concave portion 4336a4 in the swinging direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

凸設部4336b4は、本体部4336b1の背面側端部に形成される。これにより、伝達部材4336bを連結側壁部331cに近接させる方向に揺動させることで、ねじりバネSP41の付勢力により揺動する本体部材4336aの背面側側面を連結側壁部331cと当接させることができる。   The projecting portion 4336b4 is formed at the rear side end of the main body portion 4336b1. Thus, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in the direction to approach the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back side surface of the main body member 4336a that is swung by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. it can.

図45(a)及び図45(b)は、ロック部材4336の側面図である。なお、図45(a)及び図45(b)では、駆動ギア337b及び連結側壁部331cが組立状態の配置で図示される。   FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B are side views of the lock member 4336. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are illustrated in an assembled state.

ロック部材4336は、図45(a)に示すロック待機状態と、図45(b)に示すロック強制解除状態とを構成可能とされる。なお、ロック待機状態とは、伝達部材4336bが連結側壁部331cに近接配置され本体部材4336aが連結側壁部331cに当接された状態を意味する。   The lock member 4336 can be configured in a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45A and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is disposed in proximity to the connection side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connection side wall portion 331c.

また、ロック強制解除状態とは、ロック待機状態から駆動ギア337bが回転し伝達部材4336bが連結側壁部331cから離反する方向に揺動されることで本体部材4336aのレバー部材4340と対向する側の端部がレバー部材4340と当接しない位置に配置された状態を意味する。ロック強制解除状態では、伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4が凹設部4336a4に当接し本体部材4336aの姿勢を保持する。   Further, the lock forcibly released state means that the drive gear 337b is rotated from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung away from the connection side wall portion 331c so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. This means that the end portion is disposed at a position where it does not contact the lever member 4340. In the lock forcibly released state, the protruding portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b contacts the recessed portion 4336a4 and maintains the posture of the main body member 4336a.

ロック待機状態において、レバー部材4340が本体部材4336aの上方から当接すれば、ロック部材4336によりレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる(図47(a)参照)。レバー部材4340の揺動が規制された状態からロック強制解除状態にすれば、レバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解けて、レバー部材4340が揺動可能とされる(図48参照)。   When the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a in the lock standby state, the swing of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A). If the swing of the lever member 4340 is changed from the restricted state to the lock forcibly released state, the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 is made swingable (see FIG. 48).

ここで、再度ロック待機状態とすることで(駆動ギア337bを回転させて、伝達部材4336bを図6−1時計回りに回すことで)、後述するように、レバー部材4340のロック部材4336と当接する側の端部がロック部材4336を上方に乗り越えることに伴って自動的にレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。一方、ロック強制解除状態を維持しておくことで、レバー部材4340の揺動が規制されることを防止することができる。   Here, by setting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and rotating the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6A), as described later, the lock member 4336 of the lever member 4340 is contacted. As the contacting end moves over the lock member 4336 upward, the swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically restricted. On the other hand, maintaining the lock forcibly released state can prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

図46は、レバー部材4340及び首振り操作部材310の正面分解斜視図である。レバー部材4340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材4341と、本体部材4341の軸孔341bと同軸で軸支されるロック受け部材4350と、を主に備えて構成される。   FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a lock receiving member 4350 that is coaxially supported by the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341, It is mainly composed of.

本体部材4341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成され後端部左側(図46左側)に切り欠きを有する前方本体部4341aと、その前方本体部4341a1の切り欠きを補填する態様で配設される断面L字状の後方本体部4341a2と、その後方本体部4341a2の上面側に締結固定され電流が導通している時のみ後方本体部4341a2と前方本体部4341a1とを吸着する電磁石部材M41と、前方本体部4341a1の略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、を主に備える。   The main body member 4341 is formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section and has a front main body portion 4341a having a notch on the left side of the rear end (left side in FIG. 46) and a notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. The rear main body portion 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section, and an electromagnet member M41 that adsorbs the rear main body portion 4341a2 and the front main body portion 4341a1 only when the current is conducted and fastened to the upper surface side of the rear main body portion 4341a2. And a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1.

ロック受け部材4350は、前後に長尺の略直方体状に形成されると共にレバー部材4340の後方本体部4341a2の下面に締結固定される本体部4351と、その本体部4351の前側端部において左右方向に穿設され軸孔341bと同軸でレバー支持軸331d1(図43参照)に軸支される軸孔4352と、を主に備える。そのため、後方本体部4341a2が前方本体部4341a1とは独立してレバー支持軸331d1を中心に揺動可能とされるが、それについては後述する。   The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that is elongated in the front-rear direction and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the main body portion 4351. And a shaft hole 4352 that is coaxial with the shaft hole 341b and supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

図47(a)及び図47(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図47(a)及び図47(b)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図47(b)では図47(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363(図46参照)を軸に後方に首振り操作された状態が図示されると共に、首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。本実施形態では、図47(a)の状態を初期位置とする。また、図17(a)では操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は同じなので、操作デバイス4300とみなして説明を行う。以下、本実施形態において同様である。   47A and 47B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung rearward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is illustrated, and a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 17A, the operation device 300 is illustrated, but since the external appearance is the same, the operation device 4300 is regarded as being described. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図47(b)に示すように、第1実施形態と同様に、レバー部材4340の揺動が規制された状態で首振り操作部材310を首振り操作し、裏ボタン部材312dを押し込み操作することができる。   As shown in FIG. 47 (b), as in the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can do.

本実施形態では、ロック部材4336がレバー支持軸331d1の後方においてレバー部材4340に下側から当接されるので、首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる誤操作に対して、ロック部材4336の強度で抵抗することができる。   In this embodiment, since the lock member 4336 is in contact with the lever member 4340 from the lower side behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the lock member 4336 resists the erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 with the strength of the lock member 4336. Can do.

レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材4336とロック軸4331d3よりも後方で当接されることで、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態(図45(b)参照)側へ揺動することを抑制することができる。これにより、ロック部材4336が前倒れする方向(図47(a)左方向)にレバー部材4340からロック部材4336に荷重を与えることができ、ロック部材4336の姿勢を保持することができる。   The rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts behind the lock member 4336 and the lock shaft 4331d3, thereby suppressing the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the lock forcibly released state (see FIG. 45B). can do. Accordingly, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 is tilted forward (leftward in FIG. 47A), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

また、本実施形態ではレバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4336で規制する状態において、偏心カム部材4333をレバー部材4340から離間させておける。そのため、レバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4336で規制している間に偏心カム部材4333が誤作動等により回転した場合に、偏心カム部材4333やレバー部材4340が破損することを防止することができる。   In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged when the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. it can.

図48は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図48では、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされ、レバー部材4340が揺動し始めた状態が図示される。   FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which the lock member 4336 is in a lock forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

図48に示すように、ロック部材4336にレバー部材4340が揺動を規制された状態(図47(a)参照)からロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされると、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によりレバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(図48時計回り)に揺動する。   As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is brought into the lock forcibly released state from the state where the lever member 4340 is prevented from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 As a result, the lever member 4340 swings in the direction in which it rises (clockwise in FIG. 48).

これにより、遊技者に対して操作デバイス4300を操作することを促すことができるが、レバー部材4340の揺動速度がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により定まり、毎回変わらないので、演出自由度が低減されるという問題点があった。   This can prompt the player to operate the operation device 4300, but the swinging speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, and does not change every time, so the degree of freedom in performance is reduced. There was a problem that.

なお、レバー部材4340と当接する際の偏心カム部材4333の姿勢を様々に変化させ、偏心カム部材4333の回転とレバー部材4340の揺動とを連動させることで動作速度を多様にすることもできるが、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に誤って高速で衝突した場合に偏心カム部材4333が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。そのため、ロック部材4336をロック強制解除状態へ向けて揺動させるタイミングは、偏心カム部材4333が退避位相(図49(a)参照)とされていることを第3センサ部材325a3(図9参照)で検出してからとすることが好ましい。   The operation speed can be varied by changing the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 in contact with the lever member 4340 in various ways and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at a high speed, the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) when the lock member 4336 is swung toward the lock forcibly released state. It is preferable that it is detected after.

ここで、首振り操作部材310に内包される振動装置366の振動の反作用は、直線L1に沿ってレバー部材4340を前倒れさせる方向に作用する。これにより、例えば、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(図48時計回り)に揺動している最中に振動装置366を振動させることで、レバー部材4340を前倒れする方向に押し戻すことができ、レバー部材4340の揺動速度や揺動の態様を変化させることができる(遅くすることができる)。従って、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に誤って高速で衝突することを防ぐことができる。   Here, the reaction of vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in a direction in which the lever member 4340 is tilted forward along the straight line L1. Thus, for example, by vibrating the vibration device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction in which the lever member 4340 rises (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, the lever member 4340 can be prevented from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

図49(a)及び図49(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図49(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図49(b)では、図49(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が後方(図49(a)右方向)へ向けて押し込み操作された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。   49A and 49B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 49A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position, and in FIG. 49B, the swing operation member 310 is rearward from the state in FIG. 49 (a) (right direction) is shown, and the swinging operation member 310 is not shown in cross section.

図49(a)及び図49(b)では、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態で維持される。そのため、例えば、図49(a)の状態から遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持し上下に移動させる操作をおこなったとしても、ロック部材4336によってレバー部材4340の揺動が規制されないので、遊技者が手を離せばねじりバネSP1の付勢力により首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に復帰する。   49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the lock forcibly released state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of holding the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state shown in FIG. 49A, the swing of the lever member 4340 is not restricted by the lock member 4336. When the person releases the hand, the swing operation member 310 is returned to the upward position by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1.

図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)は図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)では、偏心カム部材4333の回転によりレバー部材4340が揺動する様子が時系列に沿って図示される。   50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is illustrated in time series. The

図50(a)では、偏心カム部材4333が退避位相とされ、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に当接されると共にロック部材4336がロック待機状態とされた状態が図示され、図50(b)では、図50(a)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が約90度だけ図50(a)反時計回りに回転した状態が図示される。   FIG. 50A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

また、図51(a)では、図50(b)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が更に同一方向に回転し、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336の上端に当接され揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図51(b)では、図51(a)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が更に同一方向に回転し、退避位相(図50(a)参照)とされた状態が図示される。   In FIG. 51A, the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50B, and the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the swinging thereof is restricted. FIG. 51B shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51A to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50A).

図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)に示すように、操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置されてから遊技者が押し下げ動作を行わない場合でも、偏心カム部材4333によりレバー部材4340を揺動させることで、首振り操作部材を下向き位置(初期位置)まで移動させることができる。   As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is placed in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333, the swing operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position).

ロック部材4336は、ロック待機状態とされる。この場合、ロック部材4336の左側側面をレバー部材4340が押すことでロック部材4336が後倒れする方向に回転する(図50(b)参照)。一方で、ロック部材4336は、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)により常に前倒れする方向に付勢されるので、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336の上方まで移動すると、付勢力によりレバー部材4340の下側に入り込む(図51(a)参照)。このように、レバー部材4340を揺動させる過程において、ロック部材4336が自動でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する。   The lock member 4336 is placed in a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in a direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts backward (see FIG. 50B). On the other hand, the lock member 4336 is always urged in the direction to be tilted forward by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, when the lever member 4340 moves to above the lock member 4336, the urging force causes (See FIG. 51 (a)). In this manner, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げるタイミングが不明であっても、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されることにより、ロック部材4336でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することを確実に行うことができる。   For this reason, even when the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the swing member 4340 is placed in the downward position so that the lock member 4336 restricts the swing of the lever member 4340. It can be done reliably.

レバー部材4340の揺動が規制される配置(図51(a)参照)では、偏心カム部材4333の最大径部分がレバー部材4340と当接される。そのため、レバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4333により規制した状態(図51(a)参照)で、偏心カム部材4333を逆回転させて戻すのではなく、同一方向に回転させ続けることで偏心カム部材4333を退避位相に復帰させることができる。従って、偏心カム部材4333を逆回転させるタイミングを検出する検出装置を不要とできると共に、偏心カム部材4333を駆動させる第1駆動装置335の制御を容易に行うことができる。   In the arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51A), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is brought into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51A), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated backward and returned, but is kept rotating in the same direction. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, a detection device that detects the timing of rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in reverse can be omitted, and the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333 can be easily controlled.

図52は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図50(a)の状態におけるレバー部材4340、首振り操作部材310及び偏心カム部材4333の外形が想像線で図示される。   FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state shown in FIG.

図52に示すように、偏心カム部材4333を偏心カム軸331d2中心に角度θ41で往復回転することで、レバー部材4340をレバー支持軸331d1中心に角度θ42で往復揺動させることができる。これにより、遊技者に操作デバイス4300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。   As shown in FIG. 52, when the eccentric cam member 4333 is reciprocally rotated about the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung about the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a turning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

この際、偏心カム部材4333のカム部4333cをレバー支持軸331d1の反対側に配置した状態で往復回転させることで、偏心カム部材4333とレバー部材4340との当接位置からレバー支持軸331d1までの距離を長く保つことができる。これにより、レバー部材4340を揺動させるために必要な駆動力を抑制できる(駆動力が小さくても良い)と共に、レバー部材4340から偏心カム部材4333にかけられる荷重を抑制することができる(過荷重にも耐えられる)。   At this time, the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 is reciprocally rotated in a state where the cam portion 4333c is disposed on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the position from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. The distance can be kept long. Accordingly, the driving force necessary to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

また、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされることで、レバー部材4340を往復揺動させる際に、ロック部材4336からレバー部材4340が負荷を与えられることを防止でき、偏心カム部材4333を回転させるために第1駆動装置335(図43参照)が発生させる駆動力を抑制することができる。   Further, when the lock member 4336 is in the lock forcibly released state, when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, the lever member 4340 can be prevented from being loaded, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43) can be suppressed.

図53(a)は、レバー部材4340の本体部材4341及びロック受け部材4350の上面図であり、図53(b)及び図53(c)は、図53(a)のLIIIb方向視におけるレバー部材4340の本体部材4341及びロック受け部材4350の側面図である。なお、図53(c)は、図53(a)の状態から、前方本体部4341a1が電磁石部材M41から離反する方向に揺動した状態が図示される。   53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340. FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) show the lever member as viewed in the LIIIb direction of FIG. 53 (a). 4 is a side view of a main body member 4341 and a lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. FIG. FIG. 53 (c) illustrates a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 is swung in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

図53(a)に示すように、前方本体部4341a1及び後方本体部4341a2が電磁石部材M41により吸着される。そのため、電磁石部材M41の吸着力以上の荷重が本体部材4341に与えられない限り、前方本体部4341a1及び後方本体部4341a2が一体で揺動される。   As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are adsorbed by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341.

一方、電磁石部材M41は、電流の導通が停止すれば吸着力を失う。そのため、例えば、電源が切られた状態では、前方本体部4341a1と後方本体部4341a2との相対的な位置(角度)が変化する(図53(c)参照)。   On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the current conduction stops. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53C).

図54(a)及び図54(b)は、図6のVIb―VIb線で断面視したパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300の部分断面図である。なお、図6では、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10及び操作デバイス300が図示されているが、第4実施形態のパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300と外観は同じなので、第4実施形態のパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300が図示されていると見なして説明を行う。   54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 as viewed in section along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. In FIG. 6, the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment are illustrated. However, since the external appearance is the same as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. Description will be made assuming that 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

ここで、操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置されるか、下向き位置に配置されるかで、首振り操作部材310の正面側への張出長さが変化する。即ち、図54(b)に図示される状態に比較して、図54(a)に図示される状態の方が、首振り操作部材310が距離X41だけ正面側に張り出される。   Here, in the operation device 4300, the protrusion length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position or the downward position. That is, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54B, the swing operation member 310 is projected to the front side by the distance X41 in the state shown in FIG.

この場合、パチンコ機4010の前後方向の幅寸法が図54(b)に示す状態の方が小さくなるので、例えば、パチンコ機4010を梱包する箱を選定する際に、図54(b)に示す状態を基準として選定した方が、箱を小さくすることができる。一方で、レバー部材4340が直線棒状で固定される場合にロック部材4336に揺動を規制された状態で電源が切られると、首振り操作部材310に外部から力を加えても首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に配置することができず、パチンコ機4010を梱包用の箱に入れることができないという問題点があった。   In this case, since the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 4010 is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54B, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. The box can be made smaller by selecting based on the state. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off with the lock member 4336 restricted from swinging, the swinging operation member 310 can be applied even if external force is applied to the swinging operation member 310. There was a problem that 310 could not be placed in the upward position, and the pachinko machine 4010 could not be put in the packing box.

また、工場の検査ライン等で、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態のパチンコ機4010の幅でラインの幅を決めておくと、首振り操作部材310が誤って下向き位置に配置された状態でラインを流れることにより、検査機等に首振り操作部材310が衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。   In addition, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is placed in the upward position on a factory inspection line or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously placed in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in such a state.

一方、本実施形態では、レバー部材4340の本体部材4341を一体化させている電磁石部材M41の吸着力が、電源を切ることにより失われる。そのため、電源を切ることによって、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に当接しているか否かに関わらず、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によりレバー部材4340の前方本体部4341a1を起き上がる方向に揺動させ、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に配置することができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, by turning off the power, regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 swings the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 in the rising direction. The swing operation member 310 can be disposed in an upward position.

これにより、梱包時に首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に確実に配置させることができる。また、パチンコ機4010を検査ラインに流す際に電源を切ることで、検査機等に首振り操作部材310が衝突することを防止することができる。   Thereby, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is passed through the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

次いで、図55から図61を参照して、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300について説明する。第4実施形態では偏心カム部材4333及びロック部材4336が独立で駆動される場合を説明したが、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300は、偏心カム部材5333及びロック部材5336が単一の駆動モータ335aで同期駆動される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. Although the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described in the fourth embodiment, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment has a single drive motor 335a having the single eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336. Are driven synchronously. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図55は、第5実施形態における内側ケース部材5330の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図55では、右カバー部材の図示が省略される。   FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the right cover member is not shown.

図55に示すように、内側ケース部材5330は、偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材5333と、偏心カム軸331d2の後方に駆動ギア335bを挟んで配置される円柱形状のロック解除軸5331d5と、そのロック解除軸5331d5に軸支されるロック解除カム部材5339と、ロック軸4331d3に軸支されるロック部材5336と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 includes an eccentric cam member 5333 that is pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, and a cylindrical unlocking shaft that is disposed behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 with a drive gear 335b interposed therebetween. 5331d5, a lock release cam member 5339 supported by the lock release shaft 5331d5, and a lock member 5336 supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 are mainly provided.

図56(a)は、偏心カム部材5333の正面図であり、図56(b)は、図56(a)のLVIb方向視における偏心カム部材5333の底面図であり、図56(c)は、図56(a)のLVIc方向視における偏心カム部材5333の側面図である。   56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. FIG. 57 is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIc direction of FIG.

図56に示すように、偏心カム部材5333は、正面視略D字状のカム部5333cと、部分的に切り欠き5333f1が配設される傘部5333fと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D shape in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially disposed.

カム部5333cは、正面視略D字状に形成され、直線形状で偏心カム部材5333の最大径端部まで延設されると共に剛性の高い剛体部5333c1と、その剛体部5333c1に比較して剛性が低くレバー部材4340からの衝撃を緩和する緩衝部5333c2と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、剛体部5333c1の正面視における厚さが緩衝部5333c2の正面視における厚さの略3倍に設定される。   The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D shape when viewed from the front, is linearly extended to the end portion of the maximum diameter of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has a rigid portion 5333c1 having high rigidity, and is rigid compared to the rigid portion 5333c1. And a buffer portion 5333c2 that reduces the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to approximately three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

傘部5333fの切り欠き5333f1は、駆動ギア355bに対向配置された場合に駆動ギア355bを軸方向に抜き取り可能な大きさに形成される切り欠きであって、駆動ギア355b(図55参照)に対する偏心カム部材5333の初期位相を合わせるための目印である。ここで、偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336とを単一の駆動モータ335a(図55参照)で同期動作させる場合、レバー部材4340の姿勢を検出してロック部材5336又は偏心カム部材5333の片方のみを揺動させることができないので、予め偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336との位相を合わせておく必要があるという問題点があった。   The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed to have a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when it is opposed to the drive gear 355b. The notch 5333f1 corresponds to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are operated synchronously by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is detected. Therefore, there is a problem that the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 must be matched in advance.

本実施形態では、切り欠き5333f1を傘部5333fに配設しているので、切り欠き5333f1を目印に、偏心カム部材5333の初期位相を容易に定めることができる。   In this embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is disposed in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

なお、傘部5333fを本体部333aの反対側(図56(b)下方)に配設すると、左カバー部材4331(図55参照)に第1駆動装置335(図55参照)が締結固定された状態では、偏心カム部材5333を偏心カム軸331d2に挿通する際に傘部5333fが駆動ギア335bに当たる場合には偏心カム部材5333を挿通できない。   When the umbrella portion 5333f is disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion 333a (downward in FIG. 56B), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted when the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

即ち、切り欠き5333f1を駆動ギア335bに対向させた姿勢でのみ偏心カム部材5333を偏心カム軸331d2に挿通することが可能となるので、偏心カム部材5333を正しい姿勢で組み立てることができる。   That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in a posture in which the notch 5333f1 is opposed to the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in a correct posture.

図57(a)は、ロック解除カム部材5339の正面図であり、図57(b)は、図57(a)のLVIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材5339の底面図であり、図57(c)は、図57(a)のLVIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材5339の側面図である。   57 (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 5339, and FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIb direction of FIG. 57 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIc direction of FIG.

図57に示すように、ロック解除カム部材5339は、偏心カム部材5333の本体部333aと同一の大きさに形成されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335b(図59参照)と歯合されるギア歯が形成される本体部5339aと、本体部5339aの中心に穿設されると共にロック解除軸5331d5が挿通される軸孔5339bと、本体部5339aの正面側の側面に沿って径方向外側へ向けて延設されると共にロック部材5336の係止部4336a3に当接可能な長さで形成される解除部5339cと、本体部5339aの正面側においてギア部分を覆う円板形状の傘部5339dと、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 57, the unlocking cam member 5339 is formed in the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and the gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. A main body 5339a formed with a shaft, a shaft hole 5339b that is drilled in the center of the main body 5339a and through which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 5339a. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length capable of contacting the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a, Prepare mainly.

傘部5339dは、部分的に外周面から軸側へ向けて切りかかれる切り欠き5339d1を備える。傘部5339dの切り欠き5339d1は、駆動ギア355bに対向配置された場合に駆動ギア355bを軸方向に抜き取り可能な大きさに形成される切り欠きであって、駆動ギア355b(図55参照)に対するロック解除カム部材5339の初期位相を合わせるための目印である。   The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch that is formed in a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when it is disposed opposite to the drive gear 355b, and corresponds to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the unlocking cam member 5339.

なお、傘部5339dを本体部5339aの反対側(図57(b)下方)に配設すると、左カバー部材4331(図55参照)に第1駆動装置335(図55参照)が締結固定された状態では、ロック解除カム部材5339をロック解除軸5331d5に挿通する際に傘部5339dが駆動ギア335bに当たる場合にはロック解除カム部材5339を挿通できない。   When the umbrella portion 5339d is disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (downward in FIG. 57B), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b when the unlock cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlock shaft 5331d5, the unlock cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

即ち、切り欠き5339d1を駆動ギア335bに対向させた姿勢でのみロック解除カム部材5339をロック解除軸5331d5に挿通することが可能となるので、ロック解除カム部材5339を正しい姿勢で組み立てることができる。   That is, the unlocking cam member 5339 can be inserted through the unlocking shaft 5331d5 only in a posture in which the notch 5339d1 is opposed to the drive gear 335b, so that the unlocking cam member 5339 can be assembled in a correct posture.

図58(a)は、ロック部材5336の正面図であり、図58(b)は、図58(a)のLVIII方向視におけるロック部材5336の側面図である。図58(a)及び図58(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336は、長尺板状に形成される部材で構成され、断面扇型の板形状に形成される伝達部材4336b(図44参照)は不要とされる。   58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is configured by a member formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b (FIG. 44) formed in a fan-shaped plate shape in cross section. Is unnecessary.

ロック部材5336は、長尺板状に形成される本体部材5336aと、その本体部材5336aの左右方向(図58(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔5336bと、本体部材5336aのロック解除カム部材5339と対向する側(図58(a)左側)の側面から軸支孔5336bの上方において凸出される係止部5336cと、を主に備える。   The lock member 5336 has a main body member 5336a formed in a long plate shape, and is drilled in the left-right direction (FIG. 58 (a) left-right direction) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. And a locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface (the left side in FIG. 58 (a)) of the main body member 5336a facing the lock release cam member 5339. Prepare for.

係止部5336cは、ロック軸4331d3に固定され一方の腕部が連結側壁部331cに係止されるねじりバネSP41の他方の腕部が係止されると共にロック解除カム部材5339(図57参照)の解除部5339cから押される部分である。   The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3, and one arm portion is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c. The other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c.

本体部材5336aは、ロック部材5336がロック待機状態とされた場合にレバー部材4340と当接する側の側面に、レバー部材4340の後端部の軌跡に沿って湾曲される湾曲壁部5336a1と、その湾曲壁部5336a1の上端部からレバー部材4340に近接する側に軸支孔5336bを中心とした円に沿って凸設される凸設部5336a2と、を主に備える。   The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the locus of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in a lock standby state, A projecting portion 5336a2 that mainly projects along a circle centering on the shaft support hole 5336b from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1 to the side close to the lever member 4340 is mainly provided.

凸設部5336a2は、下端面が先端に向かうほど上方に傾斜している。これにより、レバー部材4340が凸設部5336a2に引っかかる(係止される)ことを抑制することができる。そのため、偏心カム部材5333を介してレバー部材4340を駆動させる駆動力を発生させる第1駆動装置335の駆動力を抑制することができる。   The projecting portion 5336a2 is inclined upward as the lower end surface approaches the tip. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) by the protruding portion 5336a2. Therefore, the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 can be suppressed.

図59(a)及び図59(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図59(a)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336に揺動を規制される状態が図示され、図59(b)では、図59(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336を押すことでロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除され、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示される。   59A and 59B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, an unlock cam member 5339, and a lock member 5336 representing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, and the lock release cam. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a lock member 5336. FIG. 59A shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 59B, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59A. When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state where the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

図59(a)及び図59(b)に示すように、レバー部材4340に偏心カム部材5333を介して駆動力を与える前に、初期位置からレバー部材4340を揺動させることができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310が動いたら即座に首振り操作部材310を遊技者が操作することに伴って、偏心カム部材5333が破損することを抑制することができる。例えば、首振り操作部材310が初期位置から動き出した場合に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に振る操作を行ったとしても、偏心カム部材5333からレバー部材4340が離れているので、偏心カム部材5333とレバー部材4340とが衝突することを抑制することができる。   As shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged by the player operating the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts moving from the initial position, even if the player performs an operation to swing the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333. The collision between the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

これは、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する場合(例えば、第1実施形態の場合)には避けられなかった課題であって、本実施形態のように、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することで解決されたものである。   This is a problem that cannot be avoided in the case where the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted with the swing operation member 310 placed in the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment). As in the embodiment, this is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position.

なお、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持操作しない場合であっても、ロック部材5336が揺動の規制を解除する場合(図59(b)参照)の偏心カム部材5333の姿勢が機械的に決まるため、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の特定の位置(短径側の位置、カム部5333cの逆側の位置)に確実にレバー部材4340を当接させることができる。   Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the eccentric cam member 5333 is mechanically positioned when the lock member 5336 cancels the swing restriction (see FIG. 59B). Therefore, the lever member 4340 can reliably contact the lever member 4340 at a specific position of the eccentric cam member 5333 (a position on the short diameter side, a position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c).

図59(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除されレバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に当接する際に、偏心カム部材5333は筒状部333bがレバー部材4340に最も近接する姿勢をとる。そのため、レバー部材4340がカム部5333cに衝突することにより、カム部5333cが破損することを抑制することができる。   As shown in FIG. 59B, when the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the eccentric cam member 5333 has the cylindrical portion 333b with the lever. The posture closest to the member 4340 is taken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 5333c from being damaged when the lever member 4340 collides with the cam portion 5333c.

また、カム部5333cが偏心カム軸331d2を挟んでレバー部材4340の反対側に配置されることにより、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除された直後のレバー部材4340の揺動角度(移動量)を最大に確保することができる。即ち、本実施形態は、ロック部材5336と偏心カム部材5333とが同期動作する態様の内、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除された直後においてレバー部材4340の揺動角度(移動量)が最大に確保される同期の態様である。これにより、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制解除時に首振り操作部材310(図17(b)参照)が上方に移動する移動量を大きく確保でき、首振り操作部材310の演出効果を向上させることができる。   Further, since the cam portion 5333c is disposed on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The angle (movement amount) can be secured to the maximum. That is, in this embodiment, the locking member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are operated in synchronization, and immediately after the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, the swing angle ( This is a mode of synchronization in which the maximum amount of movement is ensured. Thereby, when the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) can be secured, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is achieved. Can be improved.

図60(a)及び図60(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図60(a)では、図59(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の係止部5336cの上方に配置されロック部材5336がロック待機状態に復帰した状態が図示され、図60(b)では、図60(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されレバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の湾曲壁部5336a1と摺動する状態が図示される。   60A and 60B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, an unlock cam member 5339, and a lock member 5336 showing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, and the unlock cam. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 60B shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60A, and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. A state of sliding with the part 5336a1 is shown.

図60(a)に示すように、剛体部5333c1の側面でレバー部材4340を揺動させることで、レバー部材4340の揺動速度を向上させることができる。   As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid portion 5333c1.

ここで、円形の偏心カムの長径部分にレバー部材4340の偏心カムの回転方向から当たると、偏心カムにかかるモーメントが大となり、駆動装置にかかる回転方向の荷重が大きくなる。そのため、いつレバー部材4340に偏心カムが衝突するか分からないときには、大径部分は伝達部材の回転方向で操作部材と当たらないようにすることが良い(円形の偏心カム)。一方で、いつレバー部材4340と偏心カム部材5333とが当たるのか把握できるのであれば、大外径部分(径方向外方)で操作部材を揺動させた方が、操作部材の揺動速度を大とできるので、演出効果を上げることができる。   Here, when the major axis portion of the circular eccentric cam hits from the rotational direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotational direction applied to the drive device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large-diameter portion does not contact the operation member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 come into contact with each other, the rocking speed of the operation member is increased by swinging the operation member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction). Because it can be large, the production effect can be improved.

同期駆動であれば、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に衝突するタイミングを機械的に合わせられる。従って、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に当接する際には剛体部5333c1を若干退避させ、衝突後のタイミングで剛体部5333c1をレバー部材4340に当接させることができ、レバー部材4340の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。   In the case of synchronous driving, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Accordingly, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 is slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 is swung. The speed of operation can be improved.

本実施形態では、図60(a)に示す状態と図60(b)に示す状態とを交互に繰り返す(駆動ギア335bの回転方向を交互に切り替えて回転させる)ことで、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させることができ、そのレバー部材4340の先端部に配設される首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を上下に往復揺動させることができる。   In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60A and the state shown in FIG. 60B (by switching the rotation direction of the drive gear 335b alternately). The swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be swung back and forth.

ここで、ロック部材5336を単独で駆動させる場合、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させる状態ではロック部材4336をロック強制解除状態(図48参照)とし、遊技者に操作されたり、偏心カム部材4333に押し上げられたりして、レバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動し首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された場合にロック部材4336をロック待機状態とすることで、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。   Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven alone, the lock member 4336 is forcedly released (see FIG. 48) in a state where the lever member 4340 is swung up and down, and the lock member 5336 is operated by a player or an eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 is pushed up by 4333 and swings in a direction in which the lever member 4340 is tilted forward and the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is placed in the lock standby state. Oscillation can be restricted.

これにより、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させる状態(図52参照)にロック部材4336からレバー部材4340に抵抗がかけられることを抑制し、第1駆動装置335(図55参照)に必要な駆動力を低減することができる。   As a result, it is possible to suppress resistance from being applied from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 in a state in which the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

一方、ロック部材5336と偏心カム部材5333とが同期制御される場合、ロック部材5336を駆動させる部材(本実施形態におけるロック解除カム部材5339)の姿勢が偏心カム部材5333の姿勢に依存する。そのため、特に遊技者に操作されることで首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された場合に、ロック部材5336をロック待機状態に即座に配置させることが困難な場合が生じる。   On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are synchronously controlled, the posture of the member that drives the lock member 5336 (the lock release cam member 5339 in this embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, particularly when the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position by being operated by the player, it may be difficult to immediately place the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state.

例えば、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の反対側に配置される場合、解除部5339cでロック部材5336を押し始めるまでにロック部材5336を半周回転させる必要がある。そのため、遊技者の操作に応じてロック部材5336を揺動させることが困難となる。   For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 halfway before the release portion 5339c starts to push the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the player's operation.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図60(a)及び図60(b)に示す状態においてロック部材5336が常にロック待機状態とされる。これにより、遊技者に操作され、レバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動され、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されたら常に、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接され、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制する(図62参照)。   On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the state shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the lever member 4340 whenever the player operates to swing the lever member 4340 in a forward tilting direction and the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. Then, swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 62).

しかし、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の回転により往復揺動される際にロック部材5336と当接すると、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336から抵抗を受け、偏心カム部材5333を駆動させる駆動力が過大となる恐れがある。   However, when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and a driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. There is a risk of becoming excessive.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材5336に形成される湾曲壁部5336a1により、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の回転により往復揺動される際にロック部材5336をレバー部材4340から逃がすことができるので、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336から与えられる抵抗を抑制することができる。   In contrast, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed in the lock member 5336 causes the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the resistance applied from the lock member 5336 to the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

また、図60(b)に示す状態からレバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動すると、レバー部材4340の後端部が凸設部5336a2に当接し、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態側へ向けて(図60(a)時計回り方向に)揺動させ、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336の上方へ移動し、ロック部材5336が付勢方向に復帰しロック待機状態となることでレバー部材4340の揺動が規制される。   Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the forward tilt direction from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed to the unlocked state side. (The clockwise direction in FIG. 60 (a)), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns to the biasing direction, and the lock member 5340 enters the lock standby state. Oscillation is restricted.

従って、レバー部材4340が往復揺動される際の抵抗は抑制しながら、レバー部材4340の揺動方向の規制を任意のタイミングで行うことができる。   Therefore, it is possible to restrict the swing direction of the lever member 4340 at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is swung back and forth.

なお、ロック解除カム部材5339は、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態とするときにのみロック部材5336に駆動力を伝達し(図59(b)参照)、それ以外ではロック部材5336とは駆動力の伝達を解除される。そのため、図60に示すように偏心カム部材5333を往復揺動させる場合にロック部材5336が連動して動作し、レバー部材4340に衝突するなどの不具合が生じることを防止することができる。   The unlocking cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the locking member 5336 only when the locking member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59B), and otherwise the locking member 5336 has a driving force of the locking member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, it is possible to prevent the lock member 5336 from operating in conjunction with the lever member 4340 and causing problems such as collision.

図60(a)に示すように、ロック部材5336がロック待機位置に配置されるまでは、レバー部材4340は首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される姿勢(図59(b)の姿勢)を維持する。   As shown in FIG. 60 (a), until the lock member 5336 is arranged at the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in the posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (posture in FIG. 59 (b)). To maintain.

ここで、偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336とが同期制御される場合、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態(図59(b)参照)からロック待機状態(図60(a)参照)に移動させることで偏心カム部材5333がレバー部材4340を揺動させる恐れがある。この場合、ロック待機状態で首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に維持することができないという問題点があった。   Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously controlled, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 5333 may cause the lever member 4340 to swing. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

本実施形態では、剛体部5333c1が筒状部333bの外周に接する直線状に形成されるので(図60(a)参照)、偏心カム部材5333が所定角度(図59(b)の姿勢から図60(a)の姿勢まで)回転しても、剛体部5333c1とレバー部材4340との間の隙間が埋まるに留まり、レバー部材4340が揺動することを抑制することができる。これにより、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態からロック待機状態にする間、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に維持することができる。   In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 333b (see FIG. 60A), the eccentric cam member 5333 is viewed from a posture at a predetermined angle (FIG. 59B). 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 remains filled, and the lever member 4340 can be prevented from swinging. Thus, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

図61(a)及び図61(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図61(a)では、図60(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接された状態が図示され、図61(b)では、図61(a)に示す状態から偏心カム部材5333が回転し、ロック部材5336の上側面がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接する配置まで回転された状態が図示される。   61A and 61B are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 61A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and has been rotated to the position where the upper surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. The

図61(a)に示すように、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2を押し上げることにより、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340から離反する方向に回転する。更に偏心カム部材5333を回転させると、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の上端部よりも上方へ移動することで、ロック部材5336がねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の付勢力により復帰され、レバー部材4340の移動をロック部材5336の上側面で規制可能となる。   As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted on the upper surface of the lock member 5336.

レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接するまでは、湾曲壁部5336a1によりレバー部材4340からロック部材5336が逃げる態様とされることで、レバー部材4340にロック部材5336からかけられる抵抗を抑制可能な構造とされる。   Until the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the projecting portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 is caused to escape from the lever member 4340 by the curved wall portion 5336a1, so that the lock member 5336 is locked to the lever member 4340. It is set as the structure which can suppress the resistance applied from an iron.

また、レバー部材4340からロック部材5336へ荷重がかけられるのは、凸設部5336a2にレバー部材4340の後端部が当接する短い期間とされるので、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の反力を大きく確保でき、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下方へ入り込む(図61(b)参照)速度を大きく確保することができる。従って、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の移動の規制を確実に行うことができる。   In addition, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and thus the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The locking member 5336 can enter the lower part of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B), and a large speed can be secured. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably regulated.

図62は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。なお、図62では、図60(b)に示す状態からレバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に遊技者により押し下げられた状態が図示される。   62 is a schematic diagram of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 62 shows a state where the player has pushed down the lever member 4340 from the state shown in FIG.

図61(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材5333の筒状部333bを中心としたカム部5333cの外接円C41が、レバー部材4340の下側面と接する。そのため、首振り操作部材310が遊技者に操作され、下向き位置に配置された状態で、偏心カム部材5333を反対方向(図62時計回り)に戻す必要がなく、偏心カム部材5333を同一方向(図62反時計回り)に回転させることで偏心カム部材5333を初期位置(図59(a)参照)に復帰させることができる。   As shown in FIG. 61 (b), a circumscribed circle C 41 of the cam portion 5333 c centering on the cylindrical portion 333 b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is in contact with the lower surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is disposed at the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction ( The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59A) by rotating it counterclockwise in FIG.

なお、図60(b)に示す状態から、遊技者がレバー部材4340を前倒れする方向に押し下げ操作しない場合でも、図60(b)に示す状態から偏心カム部材5333を同一方向(図62反時計回り)に回転させることでレバー部材4340を揺動させ、ロック部材5336をレバー部材4340の下側に当接させる(図61(b)参照)ことでレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。   60B, even when the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the direction to tilt forward, the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (reverse to FIG. 62) from the state shown in FIG. The lever member 4340 is swung by rotating it clockwise, and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to restrict the swing of the lever member 4340. Can do.

これにより、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態とした後で、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げる操作をするか否かに関わらず、首振り操作部材310を下向き位置に復帰させることができる。   Thereby, after the lock member 5336 is brought into the unlocked state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player performs an operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310.

次いで、図63から図65を参照して、第6実施形態について説明する。上記第5実施形態では、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされた場合に、カム部5333cの剛体部5333c1が偏心カム軸331d2の下方に配置されることでレバー部材4340の揺動幅が確保される場合を説明したが、第6実施形態における操作デバイス6300は、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされた場合に、カム部5333cの剛体部5333c1が偏心カム軸331d2の上方に配置される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is disposed below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that the swinging width of the lever member 4340 is ensured. In the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is disposed above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 when the lock member 5336 is unlocked. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図63(a)及び図63(b)は、第6実施形態におけるレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図63(a)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336に揺動を規制される状態が図示され、図63(b)では、図63(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336を押すことでロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除され、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示される。   63 (a) and 63 (b) show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member representing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339 and the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in time series. 6333 is a schematic diagram of a lock release cam member 5339 and a lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 63A shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 63B, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63A. When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state where the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

図63(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材6333は、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接する直前の状態において、カム部5333cがレバー部材4340側に向く姿勢でロック解除カム部材5339と同期されると共に、それに伴って、傘部6333fの切り欠き6333f1が、第5実施形態とは異なる配置で凹設される。   As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the eccentric cam member 6333 has an unlock cam member 5339 in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336. Accordingly, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

図63(a)及び図63(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされると、即座に偏心カム部材6333とレバー部材4340とが当接するので、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材6333の回転に追従して揺動する。そのため、本実施形態における偏心カム部材6333とロック解除カム部材5339との動作を同期させる方法によれば、ロック部材5336の規制の解除のタイミングを遊技者に認識させ難くできる。   As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is unlocked, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lock release cam member 5339 in this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the restriction of the lock member 5336.

また、レバー部材4340の揺動速度は偏心カム部材6333の回転速度によるので、ロック部材5336の解除した直後から、レバー部材4340の揺動速度を任意に設定することができる。これにより、レバー部材4340の揺動速度の設計自由度を向上し、首振り操作部材310が上下に移動することの演出効果を向上させることができる。   Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. Thereby, the freedom degree of design of the rocking speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

図64(a)及び図64(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。   FIGS. 64A and 64B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 6333, an unlock cam member 5339, and a lock member 5336 showing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, and the unlock cam. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a lock member 5336.

図64(a)では、図63(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の係止部5336cの上方に配置されロック部材5336がロック待機状態に復帰した状態が図示され、図64(b)では、図64(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され偏心カム部材6333の剛体部5333c1がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接する状態が図示される。   In FIG. 64 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336. 64B shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64A, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is below the lever member 4340. A state of contacting the side surface is shown.

図64(a)及び図64(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cが、偏心カム軸331d2を挟んでレバー部材4340の反対側に配置される場合には、レバー部材4340が揺動しても、その揺動が偏心カム軸331d2にせき止められる。そのため、カム部5333cとレバー部材4340とが衝突する恐れが無いので、偏心カム部材6333の回転速度を高速にしても、レバー部材4340とカム部5333cとが衝突する際に過荷重が生じることで偏心カム部材6333が破損することが無い。   As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is disposed on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 is disposed. Is rocked by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Even when the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload is generated when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 is not damaged.

従って、図64(a)及び図64(b)の間のみ偏心カム部材6333の回転速度を増加させることで、レバー部材4340が図64(a)の状態(レバー部材4340の後端部が最下端に配置される状態)とされる期間を短くすることができる。これにより、レバー部材4340が図64(a)の状態とされる期間を任意に設定することができるので、レバー部材4340の揺動動作の設計自由度を向上させることができる。   Therefore, by increasing the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end of the lever member 4340 is at its maximum). It is possible to shorten the period of time that is set at the lower end). Thereby, since the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64A can be arbitrarily set, the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

図65(a)及び図65(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。なお、図65(a)では、図64(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されレバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の湾曲壁部5336a1と摺動する状態が図示され、図65(b)では、図65(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接された状態が図示される。   FIGS. 65A and 65B are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 65A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336. FIG. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Is done.

また、図65(b)に示す状態から、更に偏心カム部材5333が回転することで、レバー部材4340の後端部が押し上げられ、ロック部材5336の上側面がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接することでレバー部材4340の揺動が規制される。   In addition, when the eccentric cam member 5333 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 65B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. As a result, the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted.

本実施形態では、図64(b)に示す状態と図65(a)に示す状態とを交互に繰り返す(駆動ギア335bの回転方向を交互に切り替えて回転させる)ことで、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させることができ、そのレバー部材4340の先端部に配設される首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を上下に往復揺動(煽り動作)させることができる。   In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64B and the state shown in FIG. 65A (the drive gear 335b is alternately switched and rotated). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the distal end portion of the lever member 4340 can be swung back and forth (swinging).

この場合、図64(b)及び図65(a)に示すように、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接することは無いので(ロック解除カム部材の解除部5339cがロック部材5336から離間されるので)、ロック解除カム部材5339に対してロック部材5336から抵抗がかけられることを抑制でき、偏心カム部材5333の回転の状態を安定させることができる。   In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64B and 65A, the unlocking cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the locking member 5336 (the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member is separated from the locking member 5336). Therefore, it is possible to prevent resistance from being applied to the lock release cam member 5339 from the lock member 5336, and to stabilize the rotation state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

図65(b)に示すように、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2を押し上げることにより、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340から離反する方向に回転する。更に偏心カム部材6333を回転させると、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の上端部よりも上方へ移動することで、ロック部材5336がねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の付勢力により復帰され、レバー部材4340の移動をロック部材5336の上側面で規制可能となる(図63(a)参照)。   As illustrated in FIG. 65B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336 a 2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted on the upper surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63A).

また、レバー部材4340からロック部材5336へ荷重がかけられるのは、凸設部5336a2にレバー部材4340の後端部が当接する短い期間とされるので、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の反力を大きく確保でき、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下方へ入り込む(図61(b)参照)速度を大きく確保することができる。従って、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の移動の規制を確実に行うことができる。   In addition, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and thus the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The locking member 5336 can enter the lower part of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B), and a large speed can be secured. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably regulated.

図65(a)に示す状態において、遊技者からレバー部材4340を上向きに持ち上げる方向の荷重がかけられる場合を考える。この場合、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cにレバー部材4340から下向きの荷重がかけられ、偏心カム部材6333が時計回りに回転される。本実施形態では、偏心カム部材6333とロック解除カム部材5339とが同期動作されるので、ロック解除カム部材5339の回転が規制される場合、偏心カム部材6333の回転も規制され、レバー部材4340から負荷される荷重により偏心カム部材6333が破損する恐れがある。   In the state shown in FIG. 65A, a case is considered where a load is applied in a direction in which the player lifts the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are operated synchronously, when the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted, and the lever member 4340 The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図65(a)の状態から、レバー部材4340が持ち上げ動作され、後端部が下げられる場合に、偏心カム部材6333の時計回りの回転に伴ってロック解除カム部材5339は時計回りに回転するので、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336から離反する方向に移動する。従って、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接して回転を規制される恐れはないので、偏心カム部材6333がレバー部材4340から負荷される荷重による破損することを抑制することができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted from the state of FIG. 65A and the rear end is lowered, the unlocking cam is accompanied by the clockwise rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, there is no possibility that the lock release cam member 5339 contacts the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, so that the eccentric cam member 6333 can be prevented from being damaged by a load applied from the lever member 4340.

なお、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cと、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cとが、厚み方向(図65(a)紙面垂直方向)で異なる位置(図65(a)紙面平行方向で干渉しない位置)に配置される。そのため、図65(a)の状態から偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cと、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cとが、図65(a)において近接する方向に回転しても、干渉することなくすれ違うので、偏心カム部材6333やロック解除カム部材5339の破損を防止することができる。   In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 are different in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). (Position where there is no interference in the direction parallel to the paper surface). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 rotate in the approaching direction in FIG. 65 (a) from the state of FIG. Since they pass each other, damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 can be prevented.

次いで、図66を参照して、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300について説明する。第1実施形態では、ギアダンパ338が常時レバー部材340に抵抗を与える場合を説明したが、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300は、剥離部材7350がレバー部材7340から引きはがされた時に限定してギアダンパ7347からレバー部材7340に抵抗が与えられる場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly applies resistance to the lever member 340 has been described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to when the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. A case where resistance is applied from the gear damper 7347 to the lever member 7340 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図66(a)及び図66(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300の部分断面図である。なお、図66(a)では、レバー部材7340に剥離部材7350が吸着した状態が図示され、図66(b)では、剥離部材7350の揺動がロック部材336に規制され、レバー部材7340から剥離部材7350が引きはがされた状態が図示される。   66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 66A shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340. In FIG. 66B, the swing of the peeling member 7350 is restricted by the lock member 336, and the lever member 7340 is peeled off. A state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

図66(a)に示すように、レバー部材7340は、本体部材341の内側に配設されるギアダンパ7347を備える。そのギアダンパ7347は、剥離部材7350の本体部材7351に形成される挿通孔352を中心とした円に沿ってギア歯状に形成されるギア部7351aに歯合される。   As shown in FIG. 66A, the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 disposed inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351 a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centering on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

この場合、図66(a)に示すように、レバー部材7340と剥離部材7350とが吸着固定され一体として揺動すると、ギアダンパ7347とギア部7351aとの相対的な位置関係が変化しないので、レバー部材7340がギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗を受けることはない。   In this case, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are fixed by suction and swing as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

一方、図66(b)に示すように、剥離部材7350がロック部材336に揺動を規制され、レバー部材7340から引きはがされた状態では、レバー部材7340が揺動する(遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を操作する)場合に、ギアダンパ7347とギア部7351aとの相対的な位置関係が変化するので、ギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗がレバー部材7340に与えられる。   On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66B, in the state where the peeling member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and pulled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player is necked). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

従って、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図54参照)に、剥離部材7350からレバー部材7340を引きはがすほどの過荷重を与えた場合にのみギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗がレバー部材7340に働くようにすることができる。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作感を変化させ、首振り操作部材310を適切に使用するように促すことができる。   Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is applied to the lever member 7340 only when the player gives an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) to the extent that the lever member 7340 is peeled off from the peeling member 7350. can do. Thereby, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and prompt the player to use the swing operation member 310 appropriately.

例えば、図66(b)の状態において首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作抵抗が過度に大きくなることで、遊技者にとっては操作がしづらくなり、ストレスとなる。レバー部材7340及び剥離部材7350が吸着固定された状態に戻れば、操作抵抗が小さくなり、遊技者にとって操作し易くなる。そのため、ストレスを回避しようとする遊技者ほど、首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを避けるようになる。これにより、操作デバイス7300が破壊されることを抑制することができる。   For example, the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 in the state of FIG. 66 (b) becomes excessively large, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. If the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the state of being adsorbed and fixed, the operation resistance becomes small and the player can easily operate. Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress avoids overloading the swing operation member 310. Thereby, it can suppress that the operation device 7300 is destroyed.

次いで、図67から図69を参照して、第8実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、ロック部材336,2336,4336,5336が内側ケース部材330,3330,4330,5330に軸支される場合を説明したが、第8実施形態における操作デバイス8300は、ロック部材8336が、レバー部材340の揺動に伴って内側ケース部材8330をスライド移動可能に構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, and 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, and 5330 has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment includes the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図67(a)及び図67(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第8実施形態における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス8300と同等なので、代用する。図68及び図69においても同様である。また、図67(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図67(b)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。   67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, and is used instead. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. 67A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position, and FIG. 67B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. .

図67(a)に示すように、内側ケース部材8330は、左カバー部材8331に、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿って穿設される長孔形状のスライド孔8331iを複数備える。なお、スライド孔8331iは、左カバー部材8331と一対で配設される右カバー部材(図示せず)の対応した位置に左カバー部材8331と同様に穿設される。   As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of long hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same position as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to a left cover member 8331 and a right cover member (not shown) disposed as a pair.

スライド孔8331iは、一対の長孔から構成され、内側面が平滑な表面から構成されると共にレバー支持軸331d1から離れた側に配設される第1スライド孔8331i1と、内側面が平滑な表面から構成されると共に第1スライド孔8331i1よりもレバー支持軸331d1側に配設される第2スライド孔8331i2と、を主に備える。   The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of long holes, the inner surface is formed of a smooth surface, the first slide hole 8331i1 disposed on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner surface of the surface is smooth. And a second slide hole 8331i2 disposed mainly on the lever support shaft 331d1 side of the first slide hole 8331i1.

第2スライド孔8331i2は、ロック部材8336の軸部8336fの楔状部8336f1が挿通される長孔である。ロック部材8336の姿勢により、楔状部8336f1と第2スライド孔8331i2との間の摩擦抵抗が変化する。   The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole into which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

ロック部材8336は、左カバー部材8331の内側面に沿ってスライド移動する態様で配設される板状のスライド板8370に軸支される。ロック部材8336は、軸支孔336bに挿通される円柱形状の部位であると共にスライド板8370を貫通する軸部8336fを備え、その軸部8336fを介してスライド板8370に軸支される。   The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-like slide plate 8370 that is disposed in a manner that slides along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and includes a shaft portion 8336f that passes through the slide plate 8370, and is supported by the slide plate 8370 through the shaft portion 8336f.

軸部8336fは、軸方向の一部であって第2スライド孔8331i2に挿通される楔状部8336f1を備える。楔状部8336f1は、対向配置された状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の長手方向に延設される側面と所定距離だけ離れる態様(図67(a)参照)で形成される一対の第1側面8336f1aと、対向配置された状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の長手方向に延設される側面と面当たりする(図68(a)参照)一対の第2側面8336f1bと、を主に備え、各側面が若干湾曲した略ひし形状に構成される。   The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 that is a part of the axial direction and is inserted through the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a mode (see FIG. 67 (a)) that is separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance. In the state of being opposed to each other, it mainly includes a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 and a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b (see FIG. 68 (a)), each side surface being slightly It is configured in a curved substantially rhombus shape.

第1側面8336f1aは、図67(a)に示すように、ロック部材8336が解除側に位置する状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の曲線形状に沿った(曲率半径の同一な)曲面形状から形成される。また、第2側面8336f1bは、図68(a)に示すように、ロック部材8336が固定側に位置する状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の曲線形状に沿った(曲率半径の同一な)曲面形状から形成される。   As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first side surface 8336f1a is formed in a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is positioned on the release side. The Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

ロック部材8336が解除位置側に配置される状態においては、第1側面8336f1aが第2スライド孔8331i2と当接せず、所定距離隙間が空けられるため、レバー部材340の揺動に追従して移動するスライド板8370の移動抵抗を抑制することができる。   In a state where the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not contact the second slide hole 8331i2, and a predetermined distance gap is formed, so that the lever member 340 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the sliding plate 8370.

なお、図67(b)では、ロック部材8336が解除側の位置から所定量固定側の位置へ向けて回転された状態が図示される。この状態においても、楔状部8336f1と第2スライド孔8331i2との間には若干の隙間が空けられる。即ち、ロック部材8336が解除側の位置から多少回転しても、スライド板8370の移動抵抗が増加することが無いので、レバー部材340の揺動抵抗を抑制でき、遊技者が操作デバイス8300を揺動操作する際の操作感を損なうことを抑制することができる。   FIG. 67B shows a state where the lock member 8336 is rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position. Even in this state, a slight gap is left between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 is slightly rotated from the release side position, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase. Therefore, the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It can suppress impairing the operational feeling at the time of dynamic operation.

一方で、ロック部材8336を解除側の位置から所定量固定側の位置へ向けて回転された状態で維持しておけば、所定のタイミングでロック部材8336を固定側に配置するまでの期間を短くすることができる。これにより、ロック部材8336を所望の位置で固定側に配置させやすくできる。   On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. Accordingly, the lock member 8336 can be easily placed on the fixed side at a desired position.

スライド板8370は、スライド孔8331iに挿通され断面円弧形状に凸設される凸設部8371と、剥離部材350と対向配置されると共に磁性体材料から形成される磁石部8372と、ロック部材8336の回転軸と駆動軸が平行になる態様でスライド板8370に配設される駆動モータ8373と、その駆動モータ8373が回転させると共にロック部材8336のギア部336dに歯合される駆動ギア8374と、を主に備える。   The slide plate 8370 includes a projecting portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and projecting in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is disposed to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 disposed on the slide plate 8370 in a manner in which the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel, and a drive gear 8374 that rotates the drive motor 8373 and meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Prepare mainly.

凸設部8371は、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧形状に形成される。これにより、凸設部8371が係止凹部8331i2に引っかかることを抑制することができる。   The protruding portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. Thereby, it can suppress that the convex part 8371 is caught in the latching recessed part 8331i2.

磁石部8372は、磁性体材料から形成され、剥離部材350に接着される。磁石部材8372が剥離部材350に接着された状態でレバー部材340が揺動されることに伴いスライド板8370がスライド孔8331iに沿ってスライド移動する。   The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is bonded to the peeling member 350. As the lever member 340 is swung in a state where the magnet member 8372 is bonded to the peeling member 350, the slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i.

駆動モータ8373は、駆動ギア8374を駆動させることによって、ロック部材8336を解除側の位置(図67(a)参照)と、固定側の位置(図68(a)参照)とに配置可能とする駆動手段である。駆動モータ8373はスライド板8370に配設されるので、スライド板8370と共にスライド移動する。   The drive motor 8373 drives the drive gear 8374 so that the lock member 8336 can be arranged at the release side position (see FIG. 67A) and the fixed side position (see FIG. 68A). Drive means. Since the drive motor 8373 is disposed on the slide plate 8370, the drive motor 8373 slides together with the slide plate 8370.

剥離部材350は、下側の側面に沿って磁気を検出する磁気センサMC1を備え、その磁気センサMC1によって、磁石部8372が剥離部材350に吸着しているか、磁石部8372から剥離部材350が離反しているかを検出可能とされる。以下、ロック部材8336の制御の一例について説明する。   The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface. The magnet sensor 8372 is attracted to the peeling member 350 by the magnetic sensor MC1, or the peeling member 350 is separated from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

ここで、図67(a)の状態では、第2センサ部材325a2(図23(b)参照)の隙間に検出片343b(図23(b)、図16参照)が配置されることで、レバー部材340が揺動範囲の終端に配置されていることが検出される。また、図67(b)の状態では、第1センサ部材325a1(図23(b)参照)の隙間に検出片343bが配置されることで、レバー部材340が揺動範囲の終端に配置されていることが検出される。   Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is disposed in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever It is detected that the member 340 is disposed at the end of the swing range. In the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is disposed in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is disposed at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

そのため、偏心カム部材333が停止した状態において、レバー部材340が図67(a)の状態と図67(b)の状態とで繰り返し切り替わるような場合には、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に最大可動範囲で繰り返し操作していることを検出することができる(主制御装置に各センサ部材325a1,325a2から信号が出力される)。この場合、レバー部材340(剥離部材350)が偏心カム部材333に繰り返し衝突することで、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。   Therefore, when the lever member 340 is repeatedly switched between the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 67 (b) when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped, the player moves the swing operation member 310. It can be detected that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main controller). In this case, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

第1実施形態のように、ロック部材336が内側ケース部材330に軸支される態様では、停止した状態のレバー部材340をロック部材336で固定することはできても、揺動途中のレバー部材340をロック部材336で固定することは困難であった。   In the aspect in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in a stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member in the middle of swinging It was difficult to fix 340 with the lock member 336.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材8336がレバー部材340に追従して移動可能とされるので、レバー部材340の揺動動作中においても、レバー部材340の揺動をロック部材8336で停止させることが可能となる。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に最大可動範囲で繰り返し操作していることを検出した場合に、ロック部材8336を作動させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。以下、これについて説明する。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, so that the rocking of the lever member 340 is stopped by the lock member 8336 even during the rocking operation of the lever member 340. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is activated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can do. This will be described below.

図68(a)及び図68(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図68(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置と下向き位置との中間に配置された状態が図示され、図68(b)では、図68(a)の状態から所定量以上の荷重が首振り操作部材310に下向きにかけられ、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされた状態が図示される。   68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350.

図68(a)に示すように、駆動ギア8374を回転させ、ロック部材8336を固定側に配置することで、楔状部8336f1の第2側面8336f1bが第2スライド孔7332i2の両側面に当接されることで、摩擦力によりスライド板8370のスライド移動が停止される。この状態で、首振り操作部材310を押し下げる操作に対しては、ロック部材8336が下向きに剥離部材350を係止し、首振り操作部材310を押し上げる操作に対しては、磁石部8372を介してスライド板8370が上向きに剥離部材350を係止する。そのため、レバー部材340は、上下方向の負荷が多少かかったとしても、図68(a)の状態で姿勢を維持する。   As shown in FIG. 68A, by rotating the drive gear 8374 and disposing the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. Thus, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the peeling member 350 downward with respect to the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310 through the magnet portion 8372. The slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68A even if a slight load is applied in the vertical direction.

図68(a)の状態から、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に対して、下方へ所定量以上(剥離部材350の磁石部材354とレバー部材340との吸着力以上)の荷重を与えると、剥離部材350からレバー部材340から引きはがされる(図68(b)参照)。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に与えた所定量以上の荷重がロック部材8336に伝達されることで、ロック部材8336が破損することを防止することができる。   In the state of FIG. 68 (a), when a player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the adsorption force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68B). Thereby, a load of a predetermined amount or more given to the swing operation member 310 by the player is transmitted to the lock member 8336, so that the lock member 8336 can be prevented from being damaged.

図68(b)に示すように、スライド板8370がその移動範囲の途中(レバー部材340の移動範囲の途中)で固定されることで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる操作を行ったとしても、偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340が当接する前に磁石部8372に当接することで、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333に当接することを防止することができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。   As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of its movement range (in the middle of the movement range of the lever member 340), so that the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Even so, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from contacting the eccentric cam member 333 by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. This can prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

また、図68(b)に示すように、レバー部材340を揺動させることができる角度範囲(剥離部材350の上側の範囲)が狭められるため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上方に移動させることでレバー部材340に付加される勢いを抑制することができ、レバー部材340が上から剥離部材350に当接する際に生じる荷重を抑制することができる。   Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, so the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 contacts the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

これにより、レバー部材340が剥離部材350に当接される際の反作用でロック部材8336に生じる荷重を抑制することができるので、ロック部材8336を駆動させる駆動モータ8373の駆動力を抑制することができる。   Thereby, since the load generated in the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the peeling member 350 can be suppressed, the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

図69(a)及び図69(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図69(a)では、偏心カム部材333の回転により揺動されるレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が想像線で図示されると共に、ロック部材8336が解除側に配置された状態で剥離部材350が磁石部8372から引きはがされた状態におけるレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が実線で図示され、図69(b)では、図69(a)に実線で図示される状態からロック部材8336が固定側に配置された状態が図示される。   69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69 (a), the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated in phantom lines, and the peeling member is disposed in a state where the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where 350 is pulled off from the magnet portion 8372 are illustrated by solid lines, and in FIG. 69B, the lock member 8336 is moved from the state illustrated by solid lines in FIG. A state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

図69(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材333の回転によりレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が揺動する場合、スライド板8370も剥離部材350と共にスライド移動する。このとき、首振り操作部材310に下向きに高速で荷重が付与されると、スライド板8370が剥離部材350の移動速度に追従できず(スライド孔8331iとの間の摩擦抵抗により減速され)、剥離部材350とスライド板8370とが離間し得る(図69(a)実線部分参照)。   As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 downward at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (decelerated by the frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i), and the peeling is caused. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated (see the solid line portion in FIG. 69 (a)).

この場合、ロック部材8336が解除側に配置され、スライド板8370が固定されておらず、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上向きに持ち上げる操作を行うと、偏心カム部材333に剥離部材350が当接することで、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。   In this case, when the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the eccentric member 333 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. By contacting, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、剥離部材350が、剥離部材350から磁石部8372が引きはがされたことを検出する磁気センサMC1を備える。磁気センサMC1が、剥離部材350と磁石部8372とが分離したことを検出したら、即座に、ロック部材8336が固定側に配置される(図69(b)参照)ように制御することで、剥離部材350の下側面にロック部材8336の上側面を当接可能にすることができる。   On the other hand, in this embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, immediately, the lock member 8336 is controlled to be disposed on the fixed side (see FIG. 69 (b)), thereby peeling. The upper surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the member 350.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に上向きの荷重を与えたとしても、剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333に当接する前に、剥離部材350がロック部材8336に当接することで下方への移動が止められるので、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。なお、本効果は、本実施形態のように、ロック部材8336が剥離部材350と共にスライド移動する構成があって初めて発揮される効果である。   As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the peeling member 350 comes into contact with the lock member 8336 before the peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Since the movement is stopped, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged. This effect is an effect that is exhibited only when there is a configuration in which the lock member 8336 slides together with the peeling member 350 as in the present embodiment.

即ち、第1実施形態のように、ロック部材336が内側ケース部材330に軸支される場合、偏心カム部材333の位相によっては(例えば、図24(b)参照)、ロック部材336を固定側に配置しても、ロック部材336の上側面よりも偏心カム部材333の上側面が剥離部材350側に張り出している恐れがあり、この状態で首振り操作部材310に上向きの荷重を与えられると、剥離部材350は偏心カム部材333に当接する。そのため、偏心カム部材333の破損を防ぐ効果が十分でない。   That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B), the lock member 336 is fixed to the fixed side. The upper surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude toward the peeling member 350 than the upper surface of the lock member 336. If an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state, The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged is not sufficient.

これに対し、本実施形態によれば、偏心カム部材333の回転により剥離部材350も、ロック部材8336も同様に移動する(剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333及び磁石部8372の両方と当接する状態が維持される)ので、剥離部材350が磁石部8372から引き剥がされた直後にロック部材8336を固定側に配置することで、ロック部材8336の上側面を偏心カム部材333よりも剥離部材350に近づけることができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333よりも先にロック部材8336を剥離部材350に当接させ、剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333に衝突することを防止することができる。   On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the peeling member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (the peeling member 350 is in contact with both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). Therefore, immediately after the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the lock member 8336 is disposed on the fixed side, so that the upper surface of the lock member 8336 is made to be closer to the peeling member 350 than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. Accordingly, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the peeling member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

なお、磁気センサMC1が、磁石部8372と剥離部材350が分離したことを検出した際には、偏心カム部材333の回転を停止させることが好ましい。そのまま偏心カム部材333が回転を継続し、最大径部分が剥離部材350に近づく態様で移動すると、偏心カム部材333の最大径部分がロック部材8336を越えて剥離部材350に近づいてしまう恐れがあるためである。   When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves so that the maximum diameter portion approaches the peeling member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the peeling member 350. Because.

次いで、図70を参照して、第9実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、レバー部材340,2340,3340,4340の全体が剛体である場合を説明したが、第9実施形態における操作デバイス9300は、レバー部材9340の首振り操作部材310にコイルスプリングから形成される弾性連結部材CS91,CS92を備える。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are all rigid has been described. However, the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment uses a coil spring as a swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340. The elastic connection members CS91 and CS92 are provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図70(a)及び図70(b)は、第9実施形態における操作デバイス9300の側面図である。なお、図70(a)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図70(b)では、図70(a)に示す状態において首振り操作部材310に下向きに所定量以上の荷重がかけられ、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が撓んだ状態が図示される。   FIGS. 70A and 70B are side views of the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. 70A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and FIG. 70B illustrates the swing operation member 310 downward in the state illustrated in FIG. 70A. A state where a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied and the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent is illustrated.

図70(a)及び図70(b)に示すように、レバー部材9340は、首振り操作部材310付近に上下一対で配設されるコイルスプリング状の弾性連結部材CS91,CS92を備える。   As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-like elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 disposed in the vicinity of the swing operation member 310 in a pair.

首振り操作部材310に遊技者が負荷をかけていない状態においては、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が略同等の長さに縮められた状態が維持される。なお、首振り操作部材310の重量を支えながら図70(a)の状態(双方が略同等の長さに縮められた状態)を維持するために、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数が下側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数に比較して高く設定されると共に、双方の長さは略同一とされる。   In a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are contracted to substantially the same length is maintained. In order to maintain the state of FIG. 70A (the state in which both are contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swing operation member 310, the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered. The elastic coupling member CS91 is set higher than the elastic coefficient of the side elastic coupling member CS91, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

首振り操作部材310へ遊技者から加えられる荷重が所定量よりも小さい場合においては、レバー部材9340と首振り操作部材310との相対的な位置関係が弾性連結部材CS91,CS92により維持される。   When the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

一方、図70(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310に、所定量以上の荷重が下向きにかけられると、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92の伸縮状態が変化することにより(上側の弾性連結部材CS91の長さが下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して長くなることにより)、首振り操作部材310とレバー部材9340との相対的な位置関係が崩れ、首振り操作部材310に負荷された荷重が直接的にレバー部材340の後部(剥離部材350等、図16参照)に伝達されることを抑制することができる。換言すれば、首振り操作部材310にかけられた荷重を弾性連結部材CS91,CS92の変形に消費することができる。従って、首振り操作部材310にかけられる荷重によって、外側ケース部材320の内部の部材(例えば、偏心カム部材333、図10参照)が破損することを抑制することができる。   On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 change in expansion / contraction state (upper elastic coupling member). The relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken and the load is applied to the swing operation member 310 because the length of the CS 91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. It is possible to suppress the load from being directly transmitted to the rear part of the lever member 340 (the peeling member 350 and the like, see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to members inside the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) due to the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

次いで、図71から図74を参照して、第10実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、偏心カム部材333,2333,4333,5333がレバー支持軸331d1の後方であってレバー部材340,2340,4340の下方に配設される場合を説明したが、第10実施形態における操作デバイス10300は、偏心カム部材2333が、レバー支持軸331d1の後方であってレバー部材340の上方に配設される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, and 5333 are disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, and 4340 has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図71(a)、図71(b)、図72(a)及び図72(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第10実施形態における操作デバイス10300の断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス10300と同等なので、代用する。図73及び図74においても同様に代用する。   71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a), and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 in the tenth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, which is used instead. 73 and 74 are similarly substituted.

また、図71(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図71(b)では、図71(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が図71(a)において反時計回りに所定角度θ101だけ回転した状態が図示され、図72(a)では、図71(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が図71(a)において反時計回りに角度θ101よりも大きな角度θ102だけ回転した状態が図示され、図72(b)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。   71A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position. In FIG. 71B, the eccentric cam member 2333 is changed from the state in FIG. 71A to FIG. ) Shows a state rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101. In FIG. 72 (a), the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise from the angle θ101 in FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position.

図71(a)に示すように、操作デバイス10300は、断面矩形の箱状の内側ケース部材10330を備え、その内側ケース部材10330は、レバー支持軸331d1の後方に偏心カム部材2333を軸支する偏心カム軸10331iを備えると共に、その偏心カム軸10331iから所定距離だけ離れた位置に駆動モータにより回転駆動される駆動ギア10335が配設され、その駆動ギア10335の回転により偏心カム部材2333が回転駆動される。   As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 supports the eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. A drive gear 10335 that is provided with an eccentric cam shaft 10331i and is rotationally driven by a drive motor is disposed at a position away from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Is done.

本実施形態では、弾性材料から形成されるねじりバネ状のねじりバネSP101が、レバー部材340に対して首振り操作部材310を下方へ押し下げる方向に付勢する付勢力を発生させる。   In this embodiment, the torsion spring SP101 formed of an elastic material generates a biasing force that biases the lever member 340 in a direction to push the swing operation member 310 downward.

これにより、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に押し当てられる態様で常時付勢されるので、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材2333の回転に追従させて動作させることができる。   As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly biased in such a manner that the lever member 340 is pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

本実施形態では、レバー部材340を揺動させる手段として、第2実施形態で説明した偏心カム部材2333を利用するため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げることで、レバー部材340の後端部が持ち上がり、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材2333に負荷が生じても、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが滑ることで、カム部材2333bが破損することを抑制することができる。   In this embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, so that the rear end of the lever member 340 Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, the cam member 2333b can be prevented from being damaged by sliding between the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

ここで、カム部材2333bが本体部材2333aに対して滑ることができるとしても、カム部材2333bのリブ部2333b4の延設方向とレバー部材340の上面とが垂直な姿勢で当接すると、レバー部材340からの荷重が偏心カム部材2333の径方向に働き(周方向に逃げない)、カム部材2333bが破損する恐れがある。   Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 From the other end acts in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図71(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される状態において、レバー部材340の上面と当接する部位P101が、偏心カム部材2333のリブ部2333b4から所定角度ずれた位置(図71時計回りに所定角度ずれた位置)とされる。   On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the portion P101 that contacts the upper surface of the lever member 340 in the state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position is the eccentric cam member 2333. The rib portion 2333b4 is shifted by a predetermined angle (a position shifted by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

これにより、図71(a)の状態で、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材2333に荷重が負荷されても、偏心カム部材2333の周方向に荷重が与えられ、カム部材2333bを本体部材2333aに対して滑らせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材2333が破損することを抑制することができる。   Accordingly, even when a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71A, a load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is moved to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, the eccentric cam member 2333 can be prevented from being damaged.

本実施形態では、偏心カム部材2333がレバー支持軸331d1の後上方に配置されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる誤操作を行う場合には、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に移動する。そのため、レバー部材340を持ち上げる誤操作を行うことにより偏心カム部材2333が破損することを防止することができる。   In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed on the rear upper side of the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333 when the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

なお、図71(a)の状態において、剥離部材350の下側に円柱状の部材が配設され、レバー部材340がそれ以上、揺動不可能とされる(図71(a)の姿勢が終端位置とされる)。   In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), a cylindrical member is disposed below the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 can no longer be swung (the posture shown in FIG. End position).

図71(b)に示す状態から、図72(a)に示す状態まで偏心カム部材2333が反時計回りに回転すると、首振り操作部材310が上方へ揺動する。また、図72(a)の状態から、図71(b)に示す状態まで偏心カム部材2333が逆方向(時計回り)に回転すると、首振り操作部材310が下方へ揺動する。このように、偏心カム部材2333を時計回りに回転させることと、反時計回りに回転させることとを繰り返すことによって、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復揺動(煽り動作)させることができる。これにより、遊技者にとって有利な状態や、不利な状態を報知することができる。また、操作デバイス10300を演出装置として遊技者に視認させることができる。   When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71B to the state shown in FIG. 72A, the swing operation member 310 swings upward. When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72A to the state shown in FIG. 71B, the swing operation member 310 swings downward. In this way, by repeatedly rotating the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and rotating it counterclockwise, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down (swinging). Thereby, a state advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous state can be notified. In addition, the player can visually recognize the operation device 10300 as an effect device.

なお、偏心カム部材2333の往復回転により首振り操作部材を上下に往復揺動させる場合、本実施形態のように、レバー支持軸331d1の後方に偏心カム部材2333が配置されることが好ましい。レバー支持軸331d1を遊技者側(前方)に配置し易くなり、これにより、切り欠き331c1,332c1のレバー支持軸331d1の周方向の長さが同じ場合でも、首振り操作部材310の揺動角度を大きくすることができるためである。この場合、首振り操作部材310の上下方向の移動量を大きく保つことができ、首振り操作部材310の演出効果を向上させることができる。   In the case where the swing operation member is reciprocally swung up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front side), so that the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 can be improved even when the circumferential lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 are the same. It is because it can enlarge. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

図72(b)に示す状態では、ロック部材336が固定側に配置され、剥離部材350がロック部材336に移動を規制される。そのため、首振り操作部材310に遊技者が手を乗せる等の小さな荷重をかける場合に、レバー部材340及び剥離部材350が揺動することが防止される。   In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is disposed on the fixed side, and the movement of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336. Therefore, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging when a small load, such as a player placing his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, is applied.

図73(a)、図73(b)及び図74は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス10300の断面図である。なお、図73(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置され、ロック部材336が固定側の位置に配置されると共に偏心カム部材2333がレバー部材340の反対側に退避された状態が図示され、図73(b)では、図73(a)の状態からレバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされると共に、偏心カム部材2333に当接された状態が図示され、図74では、図73(b)の状態から、偏心カム部材2333が時計回りに所定角度回転し、レバー部材340が時計周りに揺動された状態が図示されると共に、図73(b)の状態が想像線で図示される。   73 (a), 73 (b), and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73 (a), the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position, the lock member 336 is disposed at the fixed side, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state where the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 from the state of FIG. 73 (a) and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333. In FIG. From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Is illustrated.

本実施形態では、ロック部材336が固定側に配置され、レバー部材340の移動が規制されると、それに伴って、偏心カム部材2333がレバー部材340から離反する位置に移動するように制御される。これにより、首振り操作部材310に負荷がかけられ、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされ移動する場合に、偏心カム部材2333の筒状部2333b1側に当接されるので(図73(b)参照)、偏心カム部材2333のカム部2333b2が破損することを抑制することができる。   In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is disposed on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340 accordingly. . As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is pulled away from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (See (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

また、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされた後にレバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に当接されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に加える荷重の一部がレバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がすことに使用される。そのため、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に負荷する荷重を減少させることができる。   Further, according to the present embodiment, since the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is reduced. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310に押し下げ方向の荷重を加える場合に、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされるまではレバー部材340が移動しないので、遊技者に対して反力が伝えられる(首振り操作部材310の揺動抵抗が高くなる)。これにより、首振り操作部材310を押し下げるためには、遊技者は所定量以上(剥離部材350の磁石部材354とレバー部材340との間の吸着力以上)の負荷を首振り操作部材310に負荷することが必要となるので(重くなるので)、遊技者に操作感を与えることができる。   When the player applies a load in the push-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so a reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 is increased). Thus, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player loads a load on the swing operation member 310 that is a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340). Since it is necessary (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

図74に示すように、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後において、偏心カム部材2333を回転させることで、レバー部材340を揺動させ、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復動作(煽り動作)させることができる。   As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and to swing the head. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (turning operation).

これにより、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされたという内部状態の変化を遊技者に認識し難くすることができる。そのため、レバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がすという破壊動作を行うことに伴い遊技者が感じる不安感を抑制することができる。   Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state in which the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the player feels when performing the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

また、首振り操作部材310の押し下げ操作後にレバー部材340を揺動させることで、首振り操作部材310を把持している遊技者の手に反力を返すことができ、遊技者に操作感を付与することができる。   Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the reaction force can be returned to the player's hand holding the swing operation member 310, and the player feels the operation feeling. Can be granted.

一方で、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後で、偏心カム部材2333が高速で回転することで、レバー部材340が高速で往復揺動する。これにより、遊技者に異状を報知することができる。例えば、パチンコ機10の液晶表示装置に、「弱く」という文字を表示して、遊技者に、首振り操作部材310へかける荷重が強すぎることを知らせることができる。   On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at a high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocally swings at a high speed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character “weak” can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

即ち、本実施形態では、レバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がした後で偏心カム部材2333の回転に伴ってレバー部材340を上下に往復揺動させることを、遊技者に操作の反力を返し操作感を付与することにも使えるし、遊技者に異状を報知することにも使用することができる。前者の場合は、遊技者が行う操作を促進する効果を奏し、後者の場合は、遊技者が行う操作を抑制させる効果を奏する。なお、この状態の切替は、偏心カム部材2333の回転速度の大小により切り替えることができる。   That is, in this embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocated up and down in accordance with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, there is an effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, there is an effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. This state can be switched depending on the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

従って、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後における偏心カム部材2333の回転速度を切り替えることによって、遊技者に所定の操作を促進させたり、所定の操作を抑制させたりすることができる。   Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can promote the predetermined operation or perform the predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

次いで、図75を参照して、第11実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作と首振り操作部材310の揺動動作とは構造的に連関しない場合を説明したが、第11実施形態における操作デバイス11300は、首振り操作部材11310の揺動時の抵抗がレンズ部材317の押し込み動作により上昇する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swing operation of the swing operation member 310 are not structurally related has been described. However, the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment includes the swing operation member 11310. When the lens member 317 is pushed, the resistance at the time of swinging increases. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図75(a)及び図75(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第11実施形態における首振り操作部材11310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス11300と同等なので、代用する。また、図75(a)では、レンズ部材317が押し込みの負荷を受けない無負荷状態が図示され、図75(b)では、図75(a)の状態から、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。   75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 in the eleventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, which is used instead. 75A shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load. In FIG. 75B, the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 75A. The state is illustrated.

図75(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材11310では、振動装置11366の押し付け部材11366bの中心軸上に貫通孔が開口形成され、ボビン部材11366aの底壁から軸支棒363の径方向両側に向けて一対の貫通孔が開口形成される。そのため、振動装置11366を通って振動部材11314から軸支棒363まで貫通する貫通孔が開口形成される。なお、ボビン部材11366aの開口の間隔は、軸支棒363に巻き付けられるねじりバネSP2の外径よりも短くされる。   As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibration device 11366, and the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 extends from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed to open toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole that passes through the vibration device 11366 and penetrates from the vibration member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363 is formed. In addition, the space | interval of the opening of the bobbin member 11366a is made shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support bar 363.

振動部材11314は、押し付け部材11366bの貫通孔に挿通される回転止め部11314gを備える。   The vibration member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g inserted through the through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

回転止め部11314gは、押し付け部材11366bの貫通孔に挿通される棒状の部分であって、ボビン部材11366aの一対の貫通孔に挿通されると共に一対の板バネ状に形成される挟み込み部11314g1を備える。   The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-like portion that is inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and is formed into a pair of leaf springs. .

挟み込み部11314g1は、無負荷状態(図75(a)参照)では、ねじりバネSP2から離間した位置に配置され、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態(図75(b)参照)では、ねじりバネSP2を挟持する位置に配置される。ここで、挟み込み部11314g1が板バネ状に形成され、図75(b)の状態で、挟み込み部11314g1がねじりバネSP2ごと軸支棒363をくわえ込むので、首振り操作部材310の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作の抵抗を上昇させることができる。即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込む動作を行うことにより、レバー部材340に対する首振り操作部材310の揺動抵抗を上昇させることができる。   The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75A), and in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75B), the torsion spring. It is arranged at a position to sandwich SP2. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in a leaf spring shape, and the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support bar 363 together with the torsion spring SP2 in the state of FIG. 75B, so the shaft support bar 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centering on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

この場合、振動装置11366の動作時に、振動装置11366の振動が首振り操作部の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動の駆動力として消費され、遊技者に伝わる振動装置11366の振動方向(図75(a)上下方向)の振動成分が減少することを抑制することができる。   In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for swinging around the pivot rod 363 of the swing operation portion, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (see FIG. It can suppress that the vibration component of 75 (a) up-down direction) reduces.

また、遊技者がレンズ部材317を押し込み操作している時にのみ首振り操作部材310の揺動を抑制しつつ、遊技者に伝わる振動装置11366の振動成分を確保し、遊技者がレンズ部材317から手を離す無負荷状態においては、振動装置11366の振動によって首振り操作部材310を揺動動作させることができる。   In addition, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is ensured while the swinging operation member 310 is restrained from swinging only when the player pushes the lens member 317, and the player removes the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibration device 11366.

これにより、レンズ部材317を押し込む遊技者に伝わる振動成分を確保する効果と、無負荷状態では首振り操作部材11310の動作を激しくし遊技者の注目を集める効果とを、同一の振動装置11366で両立させることができる。   Thus, the same vibration device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of intensely swinging the swing operation member 11310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. Both can be achieved.

次いで、図76を参照して、第12実施形態について説明する。上記第11実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作により首振り操作部材11310の揺動動作の抵抗が上昇する場合を説明したが、第12実施形態における操作デバイス12300は、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作により規制棒365が首振り部材360の角度規制孔361dの下方の端部に押し付けられる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。   Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swing operation of the swing operation member 11310 is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described. However, the operation device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment pushes the lens member 317. As a result, the regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361d of the swinging member 360. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

図76(a)及び図76(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第12実施形態における首振り操作部材12310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス12300と同等なので、代用する。また、図76(a)では、レンズ部材317が押し込みの負荷を受けない無負荷状態が図示され、図76(b)では、図76(a)の状態から、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。   FIGS. 76A and 76B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 in the twelfth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, which is used instead. FIG. 76A shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pressing load. In FIG. 76B, the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 76A. The state is illustrated.

図76(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材12310は、中間枠部材12312と、振動部材12314と、を主に備える。   As shown in FIG. 76A, the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

中間枠部材12312は、第1実施形態の中間枠部材312(図13参照)に対して、底部312aの中心の開口が拡大される。   The intermediate frame member 12312 has a larger opening at the center of the bottom 312a than the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

振動部材12314は、本体部314aから中間枠部材12312の中心の開口の拡大部分を振動装置366に沿って下方に延設される棒状の押し付け棒部12314gを備える。押し付け棒部12314gは、先端が規制棒365に当接可能な位置まで延設される。   The vibration member 12314 includes a bar-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g that extends downward from the main body portion 314a at the center opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 along the vibration device 366. The pressing rod portion 12314g extends to a position where the tip can abut against the regulating rod 365.

押し付け棒部12314gは、無負荷状態(図76(a)参照)では、規制棒365と接する位置に配置され、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態(図76(b)参照)では、規制棒365に押し当てられる。そのため、レンズ部材317を押し込むことで、押し付け棒部12314gが移動する距離分(本体部314aと押し付け部材366bとの間の距離)だけ、首振り操作部材12310が時計回りに回転され、軸支棒365が角度規制孔361dの終端に押し付けられる。この状態において、角度規制孔361dに対して軸支棒365を固定することができるので、首振り操作部材12310の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作を抑制することができる。即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込む動作を行うことにより、レバー部材340に対する首振り操作部材12310の揺動抵抗を上昇させることができる。   The pressing rod portion 12314g is disposed at a position in contact with the regulation rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76A), and in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76B), the regulation rod. It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod 365 is pressed against the end of the angle regulating hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support bar 365 can be fixed to the angle restricting hole 361d, the swinging motion of the swing operation member 12310 around the shaft support bar 363 can be suppressed. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

この場合、振動装置366の動作時に、振動装置366の振動が首振り操作部の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動の駆動力として消費され、遊技者に伝わる振動装置366の振動方向(図76(a)上下方向)の振動成分が減少することを抑制することができる。   In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for swinging around the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation portion, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player (see FIG. It is possible to suppress the reduction of the vibration component (76 (a) in the vertical direction).

また、遊技者がレンズ部材317を押し込み操作している時にのみ首振り操作部材12310の揺動を抑制しつつ、遊技者に伝わる振動装置366の振動成分を確保し、遊技者がレンズ部材317から手を離す無負荷状態においては、振動装置366の振動によって首振り操作部材12310を揺動動作させることができる。   Further, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is ensured while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player pushes the lens member 317, and the player removes the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

これにより、レンズ部材317を押し込む遊技者に伝わる振動成分を確保する効果と、無負荷状態では首振り操作部材12310の動作を激しくし遊技者の注目を集める効果とを、同一の振動装置366で両立させることができる。   As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of ensuring the vibration component transmitted to the player pushing the lens member 317 and the effect of making the swinging operation member 12310 violently move and attract the player's attention in the no-load state. Both can be achieved.

以上、上記実施形態に基づき本発明を説明したが、本発明は上記形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で種々の変形改良が可能であることは容易に推察できるものである。   Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

上記各実施形態において、一の実施形態における構成の一部または全部を、他の実施形態における構成の一部または全部の構成と組み合わせて或いは置き換えて、別の実施形態としても良い。   In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

上記各実施形態では、レバー部材340の本体部材341が形状を固定される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、長手方向で部分的に伸縮可能とされても良い。この場合、本体部材341を縮め、首振り操作部材310を後方に収納できるように構成することで、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されパチンコ機10の前方に張り出して、梱包用の箱からはみ出す場合に、梱包用の箱に入るサイズまで首振り操作部材310の前後幅を縮めることができる。   In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be partially extensible in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is contracted so that the swing operation member 310 can be accommodated rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is disposed in a downward position and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10, so that the packaging box When protruding from the top, the front / rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits into the packing box.

上記第6実施形態では、ギアダンパ6347が、レバー部材6340から剥離部材6350が引きはがされた場合に限り粘性抵抗を生じる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ギアダンパが、レバー部材6340及び剥離部材6350が吸着固定されている場合に限って、粘性抵抗を生じるようにしても良い。この場合、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作速度に応じた抵抗を遊技者に返すことができ、操作感を向上させることができる。   In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described where the gear damper 6347 generates viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the gear damper may generate a viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are fixed by suction. In this case, resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operational feeling can be improved.

上記第4実施形態では、偏心カム部材4333の最長径部分とロック受け部材4350とが当接している時(偏心カム部材4333の回転軌跡の外接円とロック受け部材4350とが接する時)に、ロック部材4336の上端とロック受け部材4350の下端部とが当接する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ロック受け部材4350が偏心カム部材4333から上方に離間した位置でロック部材4336の上端に揺動を規制される態様でも良い。   In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350 (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350), Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end part of the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be controlled to swing at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position spaced upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

この場合、偏心カム部材4333の回転駆動によりロック受け部材4350が揺動する場合には、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に規制されることは無いため、偏心カム部材4333を一方向に回転駆動させることにより、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復動作させる煽り動作を行うことができる。   In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 is swung by the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, and therefore the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform a turning operation that causes the swing operation member 310 to reciprocate up and down.

また、例えば、偏心カム部材4333の最長径部分と偏心カム軸331d2との間の中間部がロック受け部材4350と当接している時にロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に揺動を規制される態様でも良い。   Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it ’s okay.

この場合、偏心カム部材4333を一方向に回転させることで、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336の上端よりも上側で上下に往復動作可能とされ、煽り動作を行うことができる。なお且つ、煽り動作中に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上向きに持ち上げる誤操作を行ったとしても、ロック部材4336でロック受け部材4350の揺動を規制することができ、偏心カム部材4333が破損することを防止することができる。   In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and a turning operation can be performed. In addition, even if the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the turning operation, the lock member 4350 can regulate the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 It can be prevented from being damaged.

上記第8実施形態では、レバー部材340とスライド板8370とが離間した際に、ロック部材8336がレバー部材340の下側に入り込み、レバー部材340の揺動を規制する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、内側ケース部材8330の側壁から内側ケース部材8330の内方へ向けて、伸縮する棒状部材が配設され、その棒状部材は、レバー部材340とスライド板8370とが離間する場合に伸張され、レバー部材340の後端部の下側に入り込むようにしても良い。   In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 and restricts the swinging of the lever member 340. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is disposed from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inner side of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is expanded when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, You may make it enter into the lower side of the rear-end part of the lever member 340. FIG.

この場合、ロック部材8336の鉤状の先端部の形状をレバー部材340の下側に入り込む形状にする必要が無いので、ロック部材8336の設計自由度を向上させることができる。   In this case, the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 does not need to be a shape that enters the lower side of the lever member 340, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

上記第8実施形態では、レバー部材340が揺動角度範囲の中間の姿勢とされた状態でロック部材8336が固定側に配置される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最上位置に配置された場合にロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。   In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the lock member 8336 is disposed on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in the middle of the swing angle range, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lock member 8336 may be disposed on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is disposed at the uppermost position in the swing angle range.

この場合、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされたとしても、揺動を規制された剥離部材350の上側においてレバー部材340が揺動可能な範囲が限定されているため、遊技者の操作によりレバー部材340にかけられる揺動方向の勢いが抑制される(勢いを付ける程度にレバー部材340を移動させることができない)。従って、レバー部材340が勢いよく内側ケース部材8330に衝突して内側ケース部材8330が破損することを防止することができる。   In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted. Thus, the momentum in the swinging direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that momentum is applied). Therefore, the lever member 340 can be prevented from violently colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

また、例えば、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最下位置に配置された場合にロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。この場合、レバー部材340が揺動を規制された姿勢において、レバー部材340の後端部と内側ケース部材8330の上側面との距離を遠くできるので、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされることにより遊技者に伝わる感覚が変化すること(剥離部材350の重さが遊技者に伝わらなくなり、首振り操作部材310を重く感じること)に遊技者が気付き、遊技者が首振り操作部材310にかける負荷を和らげる時間的余裕を持つことができる。   Further, for example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is disposed at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be disposed on the fixed side. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player swings the swing operation member. It is possible to have a time allowance for reducing the load applied to 310.

一方で、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最下位置に配置された場合、剥離部材350と偏心カム部材333とが当接するため、剥離部材350から偏心カム部材333に負荷が生じる恐れがある。そのため、これを防ぐために、ロック部材8336が揺動範囲の中間位置よりも情報に配置される時(偏心カム部材333が剥離部材350と当接しない時)に限って、ロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。   On the other hand, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is disposed at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the peeling member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged at information rather than the middle position of the swinging range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not contact the peeling member 350). You may make it arrange | position to.

上記第9実施形態では、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92をそれぞれ同じ長さで形成し、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数を下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して大きくする場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92をそれぞれ同じ弾性係数とし、上側の弾性連結部材CS91を下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して短くしてもいい。   In the ninth embodiment, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed with the same length, and the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic coefficient, and the upper elastic coupling member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic coupling member CS92.

この場合、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が互いに同じ長さになる(延伸される)状態において、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の方が弾性変位が大きくなり、弾性回復力が大きくなるので、弾性回復した後の状態において首振り操作部材310のレンズ部材317を上方向きに保持しやすくできる。これにより、遊技者がレンズ部材317を上方から押し込み操作すること容易とすることができる。   In this case, in the state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that it has recovered elastically. In a later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. Thereby, it can be made easy for the player to push in the lens member 317 from above.

本発明を上記各実施形態とは異なるタイプのパチンコ機等に実施してもよい。例えば、一度大当たりすると、それを含めて複数回(例えば2回、3回)大当たり状態が発生するまで、大当たり期待値が高められるようなパチンコ機(通称、2回権利物、3回権利物と称される)として実施してもよい。また、大当たり図柄が表示された後に、所定の領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるパチンコ機として実施してもよい。また、Vゾーン等の特別領域を有する入賞装置を有し、その特別領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として特別遊技状態となるパチンコ機に実施してもよい。更に、パチンコ機以外にも、アレパチ、雀球、スロットマシン、いわゆるパチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機などの各種遊技機として実施するようにしても良い。   You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

なお、スロットマシンは、例えばコインを投入して図柄有効ラインを決定させた状態で操作レバーを操作することにより図柄が変動され、ストップボタンを操作することにより図柄が停止されて確定される周知のものである。従って、スロットマシンの基本概念としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を変動表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する表示装置を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の変動表示が停止して確定表示され、その停止時の識別情報の組合せが特定のものであることを必要条件として、遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるスロットマシン」となり、この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。   In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

また、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機の具体例としては、複数の図柄からなる図柄列を変動表示した後に図柄を確定表示する表示装置を備えており、球打出用のハンドルを備えていないものが挙げられる。この場合、所定の操作(ボタン操作)に基づく所定量の球の投入の後、例えば操作レバーの操作に起因して図柄の変動が開始され、例えばストップボタンの操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、図柄の変動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄がいわゆる大当たり図柄であることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技が発生させられ、遊技者には、下部の受皿に多量の球が払い出されるものである。かかる遊技機をスロットマシンに代えて使用すれば、遊技ホールでは球のみを遊技価値として取り扱うことができるため、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが混在している現在の遊技ホールにおいてみられる、遊技価値たるメダルと球との別個の取扱による設備上の負担や遊技機設置個所の制約といった問題を解消し得る。   In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

以下に、本発明の遊技機に加えて上述した実施形態に含まれる各種発明の概念を示す。   The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<ロック時にレバー部材340が折れる構造とする技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材の移動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機において、前記移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され前記規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、前記被規制部材が、前記規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が作用することにより、前記移動部材の形状が変形可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A1。
<An example of the technical idea that the lever member 340 is bent when locked>
A gaming machine comprising: a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation; and a regulating member that regulates movement of the moving member. An operating member to be operated, and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of regulating movement by the regulating member, wherein the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, The gaming machine A1 is configured such that the shape of the moving member is deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more acts on the operating member.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が手動操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が規制部材によって所定位置で移動を規制される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動を規制された状態で遊技者が移動部材に過荷重を加えると、移動部材を通して規制部材に荷重が加わり、規制部材が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a movement member that moves between a first position and a second position when a player manually operates is restricted in movement at a predetermined position by a restriction member (for example, JP, 2014-144218, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the player applies an overload to the moving member in a state where movement is restricted, there is a possibility that the regulating member may be loaded through the moving member and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

これに対し、遊技機A1によれば、移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、被規制部材が、規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が作用することにより、移動部材の形状が変形可能とされるので、荷重が移動部材の形状変形に消費されることで、規制部材に伝達される荷重を減少させることができる。従って、遊技者が移動部材に過荷重をかけることにより規制部材が破損することを防止することができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member that is operated by the player and a controlled member that is connected to the operating member and whose movement can be controlled by the regulating member. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the restricting member, when the load of a predetermined amount or more acts on the operation member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. Thereby, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged when the player applies an overload to the moving member.

なお、荷重の負荷による移動部材の形状の変形を実現する移動部材の構成としては、例えば、移動部材の一部にバネ等の弾性部材を配設する構成や、移動部材が複数の部位から構成され各部位が磁力で吸着される構成等が例示される。   In addition, as a structure of the moving member which implement | achieves the deformation | transformation of the shape of the moving member by the load of load, for example, the structure which arrange | positions elastic members, such as a spring, in a part of moving member, or a moving member is comprised from several site | part A configuration in which each part is adsorbed by magnetic force is exemplified.

移動部材の一部にバネ等の弾性部材が配設される構成では、負荷される荷重に比例して移動部材の形状の変形の度合いが変化するため、遊技者から操作部材に過荷重がかけられる程、移動部材の変形の度合いが大きくなる。そのため、遊技者から操作部材に過荷重がかけられる程、弾性部材で消費される荷重を大きくすることができ、その分規制部材に伝達される荷重を減少させることができる。   In an arrangement in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged in a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the moving member changes in proportion to the load applied, so an overload is applied to the operation member from the player. The greater the degree of deformation, the greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, as the player overloads the operation member, the load consumed by the elastic member can be increased, and the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced accordingly.

移動部材が複数の部位から構成され各部材が磁力で吸着される構成では、吸着力以上の荷重がかけられるまでは移動部材が形状を維持し、吸着力以上の荷重がかけられて初めて移動部材の形状が変形する。これにより、吸着力以下の荷重で通常通りに操作する場合には、移動部材を剛体として扱え、移動部材の操作を容易とすることができる。   In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is adsorbed by magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the adsorption force is applied, and the movable member is not applied until a load greater than the adsorption force is applied. The shape of is deformed. Thereby, when operating normally with the load below adsorption | suction force, a moving member can be handled as a rigid body and operation of a moving member can be made easy.

遊技機A1において、前記移動部材は、前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、前記被規制部材が前記規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機A2。   In the gaming machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more of the operating member in a fixed state where the operating member is fixed to the restricted member and a state where the restricted member is restricted from moving by the restricting member. The gaming machine A2 is configured such that at least the operation member can be moved relative to the regulated member by being loaded with a load of.

遊技機A2によれば、遊技機A1の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は、操作部材が被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、被規制部材が規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも操作部材が被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされるので、固定状態において操作部材の操作性を確保しながら、非伝達状態では規制部材への荷重の伝達を抑制することができる。   According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state where the operating member is fixed to the restricted member and in a state where the restricted member is restricted from moving by the restricting member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operation member can be moved relative to the regulated member. In the non-transmission state, the transmission of the load to the regulating member can be suppressed while securing the property.

遊技機A1及び2において、前記移動部材を支持する支持部材を備え、前記移動部材を構成する前記操作部材および前記被規制部材は前記支持部材に配設される第1軸に同軸で軸支され、前記移動部材の移動は、前記第1軸を中心とした揺動であることを特徴とする遊技機A3。   The gaming machines A1 and A2 include a support member that supports the moving member, and the operation member and the regulated member that constitute the moving member are coaxially supported by a first shaft that is disposed on the support member. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the movement of the moving member is swinging about the first axis.

遊技機A3によれば、遊技機A1及び2の奏する効果に加え、操作部材が操作されることで、規制部材と被規制部材との間で大きな荷重がかかることを抑制でき、規制部材または被規制部材が破損することを抑制することができる。   According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 and 2, by operating the operation member, it can be suppressed that a large load is applied between the regulating member and the regulated member. It is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged.

遊技機A3において、前記移動部材を揺動方向に移動させる付勢力を発生させる第1付勢部材を備え、前記付勢力は前記操作部材側に加えられることを特徴とする遊技機A4。   The gaming machine A3 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a swinging direction, and the urging force is applied to the operation member side.

遊技機A4によれば、遊技機A3の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材の付勢力が操作部材側に加えられ、被規制部材側には加えられないので、規制部材に付勢部材の付勢力が加わることを防止できる。これにより、移動部材が非伝達状態となった際に規制部材が第1付勢部材から過度な付勢力を受けて破損することを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the biasing force of the first biasing member is applied to the operation member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the biasing force from being applied. Thereby, when a moving member will be in a non-transmission state, it can prevent that a control member receives the excessive biasing force from a 1st biasing member, and is damaged.

ここで、過度な付勢力が生じる場合としては、操作部材と被規制部材との間を連結する態様でバネ部材が配設され、固定状態ではバネ部材が伸縮しないが、非伝達状態で操作部材と被規制部材との間のバネ部材が伸縮され、付勢力が生じる場合が例示される。この場合、操作部材と被規制部材との間の距離の変化量が大きくなることで、被規制部材から規制部材に過度な付勢力が生じる恐れがある。   Here, when excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner to connect the operation member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand and contract in the fixed state, but the operation member in the non-transmission state The case where the spring member between the member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force is illustrated. In this case, since the amount of change in the distance between the operation member and the regulated member becomes large, an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulating member.

遊技機A4において、前記第1軸が横方向に長手方向を向けて配設され、前記第1付勢部材の付勢力が、前記操作部材を前倒れさせる方向に向けて発生し、前記固定状態の前記移動部材が、前記規制部材に揺動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで、前記非伝達状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A5。   In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the lateral direction in the longitudinal direction, and the biasing force of the first biasing member is generated in a direction in which the operation member is tilted forward, and the fixed state The non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state in which the moving member is controlled to swing by the restricting member.

ここで、第1付勢部材の付勢の方向を移動部材が起き上がる方向に設定すると、遊技者が操作部材に下向きに過荷重をかけた場合に、操作部材が被規制部材から剥離して規制部材の破損を防止できたとしても、遊技者が手を離すとすぐに操作部材が上昇するので、遊技者が過荷重をかけていることに気付かず、操作部材に繰り返し過荷重をかける恐れがあるという問題点があった。   Here, when the biasing direction of the first biasing member is set to a direction in which the moving member rises, when the player overloads the operating member downward, the operating member peels from the regulated member and is regulated. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operation member rises as soon as the player releases his / her hand, so he / she does not realize that the player is overloading and may repeatedly overload the operation member. There was a problem that there was.

これに対し、遊技機A5では、遊技機A4の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材による操作部材の付勢の方向が操作部材を前倒れされる方向に向けられるので、操作部材を下方の位置に配置させ続けることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材に過荷重を繰り返しかける事態を回避することができる。   On the other hand, in the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the direction of biasing of the operating member by the first biasing member is directed to the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward. Can continue to be placed in position. Thereby, the situation where a player repeatedly applies an overload to the operation member can be avoided.

遊技機A4において、前記第1軸が横方向に長手方向を向けて配設され、前記第1付勢部材の付勢力が、前記操作部材を上昇させる方向に向けられ、前記固定状態の前記移動部材が、前記規制部材に揺動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで、前記非伝達状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A6。   In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the lateral direction in the longitudinal direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is directed in a direction to raise the operation member, and the movement in the fixed state The gaming machine A6, wherein the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state in which the member is restricted from swinging by the restriction member.

遊技機A6によれば、遊技機A4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材を上昇させる方向に向けられ、操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで非伝達状態が構成されるので、遊技者が操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけて、移動部材が非伝達状態を構成しても、遊技者が荷重を解くと操作部材が付勢力により固定状態側へ移動する。これにより、操作部材の配置を安定化することができ、遊技者が次の操作を行いやすくすることができる。   According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A4, the non-transmission state is configured by directing the operation member upward and applying a downward load to the operation member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member and the moving member constitutes a non-transmitting state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the biasing force. Thereby, arrangement | positioning of an operation member can be stabilized and it can make it easy for a player to perform next operation.

遊技機A6において、前記移動部材が前記非伝達状態から前記固定状態へ復帰する場合の前記操作部材の揺動速度を低減する制動手段を備える遊技機A7。   In the gaming machine A6, a gaming machine A7 provided with a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operation member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

遊技機A7によれば、遊技機A6の奏する効果に加え、非伝達状態から固定状態へ復帰する際の操作部材の揺動速度が低減されるので、操作部材が固定状態に高速で復帰することで規制部材に衝撃が伝わることを抑制することができる。   According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member can return to the fixed state at high speed. Thus, it is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

遊技機A7において、前記制動手段は、前記支持部材に配設され粘性抵抗を発生可能なギアダンパであり、前記操作部材に配設されるギア部と前記ギアダンパとが歯合することを特徴とする遊技機A8。   In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating viscous resistance, and a gear portion disposed on the operation member meshes with the gear damper. Game machine A8.

遊技機A8によれば、遊技機A7の奏する効果に加え、制動手段が粘性抵抗を発生可能なギアダンパから構成されるので、操作部材の揺動速度が大きい程、操作部材にかかる抵抗は大きくなる。そのため、揺動速度が小さい(操作部材の復帰速度が小さい)場合の抵抗を抑制し、例えば、移動部材が非伝達状態の場合に遊技者が操作部材を操作して操作部材が高速で揺動する場合の抵抗は大きくすることができる。   According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the braking means is constituted by a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the greater the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. . Therefore, resistance when the swing speed is low (the return speed of the operation member is low) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in a non-transmitting state, the player operates the operation member to swing the operation member at high speed. The resistance when doing so can be increased.

これにより、揺動速度によらず、遊技者の高速の操作に対応した大きな抵抗を生じる場合に比較して、第1付勢部材の付勢力を小さく設定でき、第1付勢部材の設計自由度を向上させることができる。   As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller and the design of the first urging member can be freely set as compared with the case where a large resistance corresponding to the high speed operation of the player is generated regardless of the swing speed. The degree can be improved.

遊技機A8において、前記ギアダンパは、前記操作部材および前記被規制部材の相対移動に粘性抵抗を発生させる態様で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機A9。   In the gaming machine A8, the gear damper is arranged in such a manner that a viscous resistance is generated in relative movement of the operation member and the regulated member.

ここで、操作部材と被規制部材とが固定され一体として揺動すると、操作部材と被規制部材との相対的な位置関係が変化しないので、操作部材がギアダンパから粘性抵抗を受けることはない。   Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swinging as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

これに対し、遊技機A9によれば、遊技機A8の奏する効果に加え、非伝達状態では、操作部材が揺動する場合に、操作部材と被規制部材との相対的な位置関係が変化するので、ギアダンパの粘性抵抗が操作部材に与えられる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operating member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operation member.

従って、遊技者が操作部材に、被規制部材と操作部材とが非伝達状態を構成するほどの荷重を与えた場合にのみギアダンパの粘性抵抗が操作部材に働くようにすることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材を操作する際の操作感を変化させ、操作部材を適切に使用するように促すことができる。   Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operation member only when the player applies a load to the operation member so that the regulated member and the operation member constitute a non-transmission state. Accordingly, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the operation member, and to prompt the player to use the operation member appropriately.

例えば、操作部材を操作する際の操作抵抗が過度に大きくなることで、遊技者にとっては操作がしづらくなり、ストレスとなる。操作部材および被規制部材が固定された状態に戻れば、操作抵抗が小さくなり、遊技者にとって操作し易くできる。   For example, when the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. If the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced, and the player can easily operate.

そのため、ストレスを回避しようとする遊技者ほど、操作部材に過荷重をかけることを避けるようになる。これにより、移動部材が破壊されることを抑制することができる。   Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress avoids overloading the operation member. Thereby, it can suppress that a moving member is destroyed.

遊技機A1からA9のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を駆動させる駆動力を発生する駆動装置と、その駆動力を前記移動部材へ伝達する伝達部材と、を備え、前記移動部材が荷重を受け前記固定状態から前記非伝達状態へ変化する際に、その荷重が伝達されない位置に前記伝達部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機A10。   Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, comprising: a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member; and a transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is disposed at a position where the load is not transmitted when changing from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

遊技機A10によれば、遊技機A1からA9のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材が荷重を受け、固定状態から非伝達状態へ変化したとしても、伝達部材にはその荷重が伝達されないので、伝達部材の破損を抑制し、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmitting state, the load is not transmitted to the transmitting member. The damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

なお、移動部材から荷重が伝達されない位置としては、移動部材が荷重を受ける方向に移動するとした場合に移動部材が移動する方向の反対側の位置や、移動部材が荷重を受ける方向に移動するとした場合に移動部材が移動する方向の位置であって移動部材から所定距離だけ離間する位置などが例示される。   As a position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member, when the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load, a position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves or the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load. In this case, a position in the direction in which the moving member moves and a position separated by a predetermined distance from the moving member are exemplified.

遊技機A10において、前記移動部材が前記非伝達状態とされ、前記駆動装置から駆動力が生じる場合に、前記駆動装置の駆動力が前記操作部材に伝達され、前記被規制部材に非伝達とされることを特徴とする遊技機A11。   In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmitting state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A gaming machine A11 characterized by that.

遊技機A11によれば、遊技機A10の奏する効果に加え、規制部材により移動部材の揺動が規制される場合に、駆動装置から駆動力が生じたとしても、その際生じる駆動力は操作部材の揺動に使用され、被規制部材の揺動には使用されないので、規制部材が損傷することを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, even when the driving member generates a driving force when the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging and not used for swinging the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

遊技機A2からA11において、前記移動部材が前記固定状態とされ、前記移動部材が前記第1位置に配置される場合に比較して前記第2位置に配置される場合の方が、前記操作部材を外方に張り出させる態様で構成され、前記移動部材が第2位置に配置された場合に前記移動部材が前記規制部材により移動を規制され、前記操作部材および前記被規制部材が電磁石で吸着されることにより前記固定状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A12。   In the gaming machines A2 to A11, when the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is disposed at the second position as compared to the case where the moving member is disposed at the first position, the operation member The movement member is restricted from moving by the restriction member when the movement member is arranged at the second position, and the operation member and the restricted member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is configured such that the fixed state is configured.

ここで、第1位置で操作部材の揺動を規制した方が操作部材の外方への張り出し幅が小さいので、例えば、遊技機を梱包する箱を選定する際に、第1位置で操作部材が固定された状態を基準として選定した方が、箱を小さくすることができる。   Here, when the swinging of the operation member at the first position is restricted, the projecting width of the operation member to the outside is smaller. For example, when selecting a box for packing a gaming machine, the operation member at the first position is selected. The box can be made smaller if it is selected based on the fixed state.

一方で、第2位置で操作部材の揺動を規制した状態で電源が切られると、操作部材を第2位置から移動させることができず、遊技機を梱包用の箱に入れることができないという問題点があった。   On the other hand, if the power is turned off in a state where the swing of the operation member is restricted at the second position, the operation member cannot be moved from the second position, and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

また、工場の検査ライン等で、操作部材が第1位置に配置された状態の幅でライン幅を決めておくと、操作部材が誤って第2位置に配置され揺動を固定された状態でラインを流れることにより、検査機等に操作部材が衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。   Also, if the line width is determined by the width of the state in which the operation member is arranged at the first position in a factory inspection line or the like, the operation member is erroneously arranged at the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operation member may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

遊技機A12によれば、遊技機A2からA11のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材が操作部材を張り出させる第2位置で移動を規制されたとしても、操作部材と被規制部材とが電磁石で固定されているため、電源を落とすことで操作部材と被規制部材との固定を解くことができる。これにより、操作部材を容易に第1位置に配置することができ、梱包用の箱に遊技機を収納する事や、向上の検査ラインでの検査を容易にすることができる。   According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, even if the movement member is restricted at the second position where the operation member projects, the operation member and the regulated member are Since it is fixed with an electromagnet, the operation member and the regulated member can be unfixed by turning off the power. Thereby, an operation member can be easily arrange | positioned in a 1st position, and a game machine can be accommodated in the box for packing, and the test | inspection in an improved test | inspection line can be made easy.

<偏心カムがレバーと離間可能とされる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材を移動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置から生じる駆動力を前記移動部材に伝達する伝達部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記移動部材が一の方向に操作されることで、前記移動部材が、前記伝達部材から離反する方向に移動することを特徴とする遊技機B1。
<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force that moves the moving member, and a driving force that is generated from the driving device. A game machine comprising: a transmission member for transmitting to the game, wherein the movement member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the movement member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、ギアの歯合により駆動される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動部材の駆動中に移動部材が手動操作されると、ギアにかかる負担が大きくなり、駆動装置や伝達部材の耐久性が落ちたり、駆動により移動部材が遊技者に負荷を与えたりする恐れがあるという問題点があった。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is driven by gear engagement (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2014). (See -144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is reduced, or the moving member is moved by driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

これに対し、遊技機B1によれば、遊技者が移動部材を一方に操作することで、移動部材が伝達部材から離反する方向に移動するので、移動部材から駆動装置や伝達部材に負荷が与えられることを抑制することができる。また、駆動により、移動部材が遊技者に負荷を与えることを抑制することができる。なお、伝達部材としては、偏心カムや、ソレノイドなどが例示される。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member, so a load is applied from the moving member to the driving device and the transmission member. Can be suppressed. Moreover, it can suppress that a moving member gives a load to a player by drive. Note that examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

遊技機B1において、前記伝達部材が、第1軸に偏心して軸支され、前記第1軸を中心に回転される部材から構成されることを特徴とする遊技機B2。   In the gaming machine B1, the transmission member is constituted by a member that is eccentrically supported by a first shaft and is rotated about the first shaft.

ここで、移動部材が一の方向へ操作されることで移動部材と伝達部材とが離反されるので、逆に移動部材を他の方向へ操作すると、移動部材と伝達部材とが衝突する。移動部材の移動幅が大きくなるほど伝達部材の腕長さが長くなることが多い。この場合、衝突により伝達部材が破損する恐れがある。

これに対し、遊技機B2によれば、遊技機B1の奏する効果に加え、伝達部材が偏心カムから構成されるので、第1軸から外形までの距離が長い部分で移動部材を駆動させる際の移動量を確保しつつ、移動部材と衝突する際には第1軸から外形までの距離が短い部分を移動部材に向けた姿勢をとることで、第1軸から移動部材と伝達部材とが衝突する部分の伝達部材の腕長さを短くすることができる。これにより、伝達部材が破損することを防止することができる。
Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmission member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmission member collide with each other. In many cases, the arm length of the transmission member increases as the movement width of the movement member increases. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged by the collision.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam. While colliding with the moving member while ensuring the amount of movement, the moving member and the transmission member collide from the first shaft by taking a posture in which a portion with a short distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is directed to the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be performed. Thereby, it can prevent that a transmission member is damaged.

遊技機B2において、前記移動部材を特定の方向に移動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢部材を備え、前記特定の方向が、前記移動部材および前記伝達部材を近接させる方向であることを特徴とする遊技機B3。   The gaming machine B2 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member are brought close to each other. A gaming machine B3.

遊技機B3によれば、遊技機B2の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材の付勢力により、移動部材が伝達部材に押し付けられるので、伝達部材を第1軸中心に回転させることで、移動部材に往復移動を行わせることができる。これにより、遊技者の注目を移動部材に集めやすくできる。   According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member, so that the movement is achieved by rotating the transmission member about the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. As a result, the player's attention can be easily collected on the moving member.

遊技機B3において、前記移動部材が前記第1軸とは異なる軸であって左右方向に延設される第2軸で揺動可能に軸支され、前記移動部材が、遊技者が操作する操作部材を備え、前記伝達部材が前記第2軸を挟んで前記操作部材の反対側であって、かつ前記移動部材の下側に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機B4。   In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is pivotally supported by a second axis that is different from the first axis and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by a player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is disposed on the opposite side of the operation member across the second shaft and on the lower side of the moving member.

遊技機B4によれば、遊技機B3の奏する効果に加え、第2軸が左右方向に延設され、レバーが前倒れする方向に揺動可能とされた状態で、伝達部材が移動部材の下側かつ第2軸を挟んで操作部材の反対側に配設されるので、遊技者が操作部材を押し下げ操作する場合に、伝達部材に荷重が与えられることを抑制することができる。これにより、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the transmission member can be moved under the moving member while the second shaft extends in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the forward tilting direction. Since it is disposed on the side and on the opposite side of the operation member across the second shaft, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the transmission member when the player pushes down the operation member. Thereby, durability of a transmission member can be improved.

遊技機B4において、前記操作部材に、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機B5。   In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B5 is characterized in that a production member for producing an effect for the player is disposed on the operation member.

遊技機B5によれば、遊技機B4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材に、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出部材が配設されるので、操作部材に遊技者の注目を集めることができる。   According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the operation member is provided with the production member that produces an effect for the player, so that the player's attention can be gathered on the operation member.

なお、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出装置としては、基盤に配設されたLEDなどの発光装置や、振動を生じる振動装置等が例示される。   In addition, as a production | presentation apparatus which produces the effect with respect to a player, light-emitting devices, such as LED arrange | positioned at the board | substrate, the vibration apparatus etc. which produce a vibration are illustrated.

遊技機B5において、前記演出部材は、少なくとも振動を生じる振動装置を備え、その振動装置が振動することにより前記操作部材に加えられる荷重が、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられることを特徴とする遊技機B6。   In the gaming machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibration device that generates vibration, and a load applied to the operation member when the vibration device vibrates is directed in a direction in which the moving member is separated from the transmission member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by that.

ここで、操作部材に演出装置が配設される場合、移動部材の操作部材側の重量が重くなるため、第1付勢部材の付勢力が大きく必要となる。そのため、伝達部材にかけられる負荷が大きくなる恐れがある。   Here, when the effect device is disposed on the operation member, the weight on the operation member side of the moving member becomes heavy, and thus the urging force of the first urging member is required to be large. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may be increased.

これに対し、遊技機B6によれば、遊技機B5の奏する効果に加え、演出部材が少なくとも振動を生じる振動装置を備え、その振動装置が振動することにより操作部材に加えられる荷重が、移動部材を伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられるので、振動装置の振動により、移動部材から伝達部材へかけられる負荷を減少させることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibration device that generates vibration, and the load applied to the operation member when the vibration device vibrates is the moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member due to the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced.

遊技機B6において、前記操作部材が内部を中空とした球状に構成され、その操作部材の略中央部に前記振動装置が配設され、その振動装置によって振動する振動部が、前記操作部材の外殻と剛体として連結されることを特徴とする遊技機B7。   In the gaming machine B6, the operation member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed at a substantially central portion of the operation member, and the vibration unit that vibrates by the vibration device is disposed outside the operation member. A gaming machine B7, which is connected as a shell and a rigid body.

遊技機B7によれば、遊技機B6の奏する効果に加え、操作部材が内部を中空とした球状に構成され、その操作部材の略中央部に振動装置が配設されるので、操作部材の外形は小さく抑えながら、振動装置の大きさを確保することができる。その上で、振動装置によって振動する振動部が操作部材の内部に隠されるのではなく、操作部材の外殻と剛体として連結されるので、操作部材を操作する遊技者の手指に直に振動を伝えることができる。従って、振動装置の演出効果を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the operation member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed at a substantially central portion of the operation member. The size of the vibration device can be ensured while keeping it small. In addition, the vibration unit that vibrates by the vibration device is not concealed inside the operation member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operation member as a rigid body, so that vibration is directly applied to the finger of the player who operates the operation member. I can tell you. Therefore, the effect of the vibration device can be improved.

遊技機B3からB7のいずれかにおいて、前記操作部材は下方へ向けた押し込み動作を可能とする押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込む方向軸が、前記第2軸を挟んで前記第1軸の反対側に配置されることを特徴とする遊技機B8。   In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a pushing operation downward, and a direction axis into which the pushing member is pushed is the same as that of the first shaft across the second shaft. A gaming machine B8, which is arranged on the opposite side.

遊技機B8によれば、遊技機B3からB7のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、操作部材は下方へ向けた押し込み動作を可能とする押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込む方向軸が、第2軸を挟んで第1軸の反対側に配置されるので、遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込むことによって、移動部材が伝達部材から離反される方向に荷重を受け、伝達部材に移動部材からかけられる荷重を減少させることができる。   According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a pushing operation downward, and the direction axis into which the pushing member is pushed is the second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first shaft across the shaft, when the player pushes the pushing member, the load is applied in a direction away from the transmission member and applied to the transmission member from the moving member Can be reduced.

遊技機B8において、前記押し込み部材を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、前記押し込み部材が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されることを特徴とする遊技機B9。   In the gaming machine B8, a gaming machine B9 comprising a pushable state in which the pusher member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the pusher member is fixed so that it cannot be displaced and cannot be pushed in.

遊技機B9によれば、遊技機B8の奏する効果に加え、押し込み部材を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、押し込み部材が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されるので、遊技者の行う操作によって移動部材が受ける影響を遊技機側で切替ることができる。   According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B8, a pushable state in which the pusher member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the pusher member is fixed so that it cannot be displaced and cannot be pushed in are configured. The effect that the moving member receives by the operation performed by the person can be switched on the gaming machine side.

例えば、遊技者が押し込み部材を断続的に繰り返し押し込む(連打する)場合、押し込み部材が押し込まれた状態から戻る際に、その反作用で、移動部材が伝達部材へ近接する方向に負荷を受ける。そのため、伝達部材が破損する恐れがある。   For example, when a player repeatedly pushes the pushing member intermittently (repetitively hits), when the pushing member returns from the pushed-in state, the reaction member receives a load in the direction of approaching the transmission member. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

一方、押し込み不能状態とされる場合、遊技者の押し込み操作に対して操作部材全体が押し下げられるので、それにより移動部材も伝達部材から離反する方向に移動する。従って、遊技者が押し込み部材を連打しても、操作部材が上方へ付勢力により戻ることにより伝達部材と移動部材とが衝突するという事態を抑制することができる。   On the other hand, when the push-in is disabled, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the player's push-in operation, so that the moving member is also moved away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player strikes the pushing member repeatedly, it is possible to suppress a situation where the transmission member and the moving member collide due to the operation member returning upward by the biasing force.

なお、押し込み不能状態を構成する方法としては、鉤状の爪で押し込み部材を係止する方法や、直線的な往復運動をするボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置により押し込み部材を終端位置まで張り出させる(一方向に負荷をかけ続ける)方法等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置により押し込み部材を終端位置まで張り出させる方法によれば、その振動装置によって押し込み部材を振動させることと、押し込み部材を押し込み不能状態とすることとの両方の作用を生じさせることができる。   In addition, as a method of configuring the incompressible state, the indentation member is extended to the end position by a method of locking the indentation member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibration device such as a voice coil motor that performs linear reciprocating motion. Examples thereof include a method of continuing to apply a load in one direction. According to the method in which the pushing member is extended to the end position by the vibration device such as a voice coil motor, both the effects of vibrating the pushing member by the vibration device and making the pushing member incapable of being pushed in are produced. Can be made.

遊技機B4からB9のいずれかにおいて、前記第1軸と前記第2軸とが平行に配置され、前記伝達部材の回転方向が、前記第2軸を挟んで前記第1軸から離間する側が前記移動部材に対向する方向とされることを特徴とする遊技機B10。   In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the first shaft and the second shaft are arranged in parallel, and the rotation direction of the transmission member is the side away from the first shaft across the second shaft. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that the direction is opposite to the moving member.

遊技機B10によれば、遊技機B4からB9のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、伝達部材の回転方向が、第2軸を挟んで第1軸から遠い側で移動部材に対向する方向とされるので、伝達部材が移動部材に対向して移動する場合には、移動部材から伝達部材に与えられる荷重が抑制される(第2軸から移動部材と伝達部材との当接位置までの距離が長くなる)ので、伝達部材が移動部材に近接する方向に移動するとしても伝達部材が破損する可能性を低くすることができる。   According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is set to the direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis across the second axis. Therefore, when the transmission member moves to face the moving member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member is suppressed (the distance from the second shaft to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

遊技機B1からB10のいずれかにおいて、前記伝達部材は第1軸で軸支され、前記駆動装置から駆動力を伝達される回転ギアと、前記第1軸に偏心して軸支されると共に前記移動部材に当接される偏心カムと、を備え、その偏心カムに対して前記回転ギアが固定される固定状態と、前記偏心カムに対して前記回転ギアが相対移動可能な非伝達状態とを構成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機B11。   In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by a first shaft, and a rotational gear to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving device, an eccentric shaft that is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and the movement An eccentric cam abutting on the member, and a fixed state in which the rotating gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotating gear is relatively movable with respect to the eccentric cam A gaming machine B11 characterized by being enabled.

遊技機B11によれば、遊技機B1からB10のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、固定状態では、伝達部材の回転により移動部材を揺動させることができると共に、偏心カムが移動部材から閾値以上の荷重を受ける場合には、偏心カムおよび回転ギアを非伝達状態とすることで、移動部材から偏心カムに加えられる荷重を逃がすことができる。これにより、偏心カムが破損することを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam exceeds the threshold value from the moving member. When receiving a load, the load applied to the eccentric cam from the moving member can be released by setting the eccentric cam and the rotating gear to the non-transmitting state. Thereby, it can prevent that an eccentric cam breaks.

なお、偏心カムと回転ギアとが非伝達状態を構成可能とされる場合とは、例えば、磁力によって偏心カムと回転ギアとが吸着固定される場合や、偏心カムと回転ギアとが周方向の摩擦で嵌合している場合等が例示される。   Note that the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear can be configured to be in a non-transmitting state includes, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are in the circumferential direction. The case where it fits by friction etc. is illustrated.

<移動部材を固定するロック部材が移動部材と同期動作される技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材を駆動させる駆動力を発生する駆動装置と、第1軸に偏心して軸支されると共に前記駆動装置の駆動力を前記移動部材に伝達する伝達部材と、前記移動部材の揺動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材の揺動を規制可能な待機状態と、前記移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する解除状態と、を構成可能とされ、前記伝達部材と前記規制部材とが前記駆動装置の駆動力により同期して動作することを特徴とする遊技機C1。
<An example of the technical idea that the locking member for fixing the moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and a shaft that is eccentrically supported by the first shaft A gaming machine comprising: a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving device to the moving member; and a restricting member that restricts swinging of the moving member, wherein the restricting member swings the moving member. It is possible to configure a controllable standby state and a release state of canceling the swing control of the moving member, and the transmission member and the control member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A gaming machine C1 characterized by this.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、駆動装置で駆動される偏心カム状の伝達部材により揺動され、その偏心カム状の伝達部材に近接する方向に移動部材を移動させる付勢力を受け、移動部材の揺動の途中で移動部材の揺動を規制すると共に所定のタイミングで移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する規制部材を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特開2013−244108号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動部材の揺動の規制を解除するのに合わせて、偏心カム状の伝達部材の短径側を移動部材と当接する側に向けることで、移動部材と偏心カム状の伝達部材とが衝突した場合の伝達部材の破損を防止できるが、何らかの理由で規制部材が誤作動した場合に、偏心カム状の伝達部材の姿勢を変化させることができず、偏心カム状の伝達部材が長径側で移動部材と衝突し、偏心カム状の伝達部材が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is swung by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member that is driven by a driving device, The biasing force that moves the moving member in the direction approaching the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is received, and the swinging of the moving member is restricted during the swinging of the moving member and at the predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a regulating member to be released (for example, see JP 2013-244108 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in accordance with the release of the swing restriction of the moving member, the short diameter side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side in contact with the moving member, so that the moving member Although it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed. There is a problem in that the cam-shaped transmission member collides with the moving member on the longer diameter side, and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

これに対し、遊技機C1によれば、移動部材に駆動力を伝達する伝達部材と、移動部材の揺動を規制する規制部材とが駆動装置の駆動力により同期して動作するので、規制部材が解除状態とされる際の伝達部材の姿勢を機械的に定めることができる。これにより、伝達部材の強度の高い側(短径側)を移動部材へ向けた状態で移動部材と伝達部材とを当接させることができるので、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the restriction member that restricts the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. It is possible to mechanically determine the posture of the transmission member when is set to the released state. Thereby, since a moving member and a transmission member can be contact | abutted in the state which orient | assigned the strength side (short diameter side) of the transmission member to the moving member, durability of a transmission member can be improved.

遊技機C1において、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する位相に限って前記伝達部材と同期動作され、前記伝達部材との同期動作が解除された場合には、前記規制部材は前記待機状態とされ、前記移動部材が所定位置まで移動することで前記移動部材の揺動が前記規制部材に規制されることを特徴とする遊技機C2。   In the gaming machine C1, the restriction member is operated in synchronization with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the restriction of swinging of the moving member, and when the synchronization operation with the transmission member is released, the restriction member is The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is in the standby state, and the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member when the moving member moves to a predetermined position.

遊技機C2によれば、遊技機C1の奏する効果に加え、規制部材が移動部材の揺動の規制を解除した後は、駆動装置の駆動力を専ら移動部材の揺動に利用することができるので、伝達部材を回転させる際に規制部材が一緒に動くことにより移動部材と衝突する等の不具合が生じることを防止することができる。   According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, after the regulating member releases the regulation of the swinging of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be used exclusively for the swinging of the moving member. Therefore, when the transmission member is rotated, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the movement of the regulating member together.

また、同期駆動中に遊技者が移動部材を操作した場合にも、所定位置に移動部材を配置することにより移動部材の揺動を規制部材により規制することができるので、繰り返し、移動部材と規制部材との同期駆動(移動部材の揺動規制を解除すること)を行うことができる。   In addition, even when the player operates the moving member during synchronous driving, the moving member can be restricted by the restricting member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (releasing the swinging restriction of the moving member) can be performed.

遊技機C2において、前記規制部材が前記待機状態とされる場合に、前記移動部材の一端が前記規制部材に乗り上げる態様で前記規制部材を移動させることで、前記移動部材の揺動が規制され、前記移動部材は、前記伝達部材の移動態様により、前記所定位置を経由しない第1動作と、前記所定位置へ至る第2動作と、を実行可能とされ、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材が前記第1動作を実行する場合に、前記移動部材の外形部の揺動軌跡から退避して凹設される凹設部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機C3。   In the gaming machine C2, when the restriction member is in the standby state, the movement of the movement member is restricted by moving the restriction member so that one end of the movement member rides on the restriction member. The moving member can execute a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on a movement mode of the transmission member, and the restricting member includes A gaming machine C3 comprising a recessed portion that is recessed from the swinging locus of the outer shape portion of the moving member when performing the first operation.

移動部材の一端が規制部材に乗り上げる態様で規制部材を移動させることで移動部材の揺動方向が規制される場合、移動部材に揺動方向の規制を与える前段階として、移動部材に対して規制部材から抵抗が加えられる。一方で、第1動作のように、揺動方向の規制を与えられることを目的としない動作の際にまで規制部材から抵抗が加わると、移動部材の駆動力が余計に必要となる。   When the swinging direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a step before giving the regulation of the swinging direction to the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to be restricted in the swinging direction as in the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

これに対し、遊技機C3によれば、遊技機C2の奏する効果に加え、移動部材が第1動作を実行する場合に、凹設部が移動部材から退避して凹設されるので、規制部材から移動部材へ抵抗が加えられることを防止することができる。これによって、伝達部材にかけられる負荷を抑制することができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, when the moving member performs the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is thus recessed. It is possible to prevent resistance from being applied to the moving member. Thereby, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、前記伝達部材は前記第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、前記規制部材による前記移動部材の揺動の規制が解除され、前記移動部材が前記伝達部材へ向けて付勢力で移動される場合に、前記伝達部材のカム部分の内で、前記移動部材と当接する側の側面である第1側面が、前記第1軸に軸支される前記伝達部材の一部分である円筒部に接する態様で構成され、前記移動部材が前記円筒部に当接し始めた際に前記第1側面が前記移動部材から退避して配置されることを特徴とする遊技機C4。   In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the game machine includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. An eccentric cam, and when the restriction of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released and the moving member is moved toward the transmitting member by a biasing force, The first side surface, which is the side surface in contact with the moving member, is configured to come into contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and the moving member is the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when starting to come into contact with the gaming machine C4.

遊技機C4によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制が解除され、移動部材が伝達部材へ向けて付勢力で移動する場合に、伝達部材のカム部分の内で、伝達部材の移動部材と当接する側の側面である第1側面が、第1軸に軸支される伝達部材の一部分である円筒部に接する態様で構成され、移動部材が円筒部に当接し始めた際に第1側面が移動部材から退避して配置されるので、移動部材の揺動変位を最大に確保することができる。従って、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制を解除した直後において移動部材の揺動変位を最大に確保する同期状態を構成することができる。   According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the restriction of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, and the moving member moves toward the transmission member with the urging force In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface of the transmission member that is in contact with the moving member, is configured to come into contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft. When the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the first side surface is retracted from the moving member, so that the swinging displacement of the moving member can be ensured to the maximum. Accordingly, it is possible to configure a synchronized state in which the swinging displacement of the moving member is ensured to the maximum immediately after the restriction of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released.

遊技機C4において、前記第1側面の前記円筒部の反対側の端部が、前記移動部材と前記伝達部材との当たり始めから当接することを特徴とする遊技機C5。   In the gaming machine C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that an end of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmitting member from the beginning.

遊技機C5によれば、遊技機C4の奏する効果に加え、移動部材の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

ここで、円形の偏心カムの長径部分に移動部材が偏心カムの回転方向から当たると、偏心カムにかかるモーメントが大となり、駆動装置にかかる回転方向の荷重が大きくなる。そのため、いつ移動部材に伝達部材が衝突するか分からないときには、大径部分は伝達部材の回転方向で移動部材と当たらないようにすることが良い(円形の偏心カム)。一方で、いつ移動部材と伝達部材とが当たるのか把握できるのであれば、大外径部分で移動部材を揺動させた方が、移動部材の揺動速度を大とできるので、演出効果を上げることができる。   Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotational direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotational direction applied to the drive device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not contact the moving member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member hits the transmission member, it is possible to increase the swinging speed of the moving member by swinging the moving member at the large outer diameter portion, so that the effect is enhanced. be able to.

同期駆動であれば、移動部材が伝達部材に衝突するタイミングを機械的に合わせられる。従って、移動部材が伝達部材に当接する際には第1側面を若干退避させ、衝突後のタイミングで第1側面を移動部材に当接させることができ、移動部材の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。   In the case of synchronous driving, the timing when the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically matched. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface is slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, thereby improving the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member. Can be made.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、前記伝達部材は前記第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、前記規制部材による前記移動部材の揺動の規制が解除される際に、前記伝達部材が前記移動部材に当接し、前記伝達部材の回転に追従して前記移動部材が揺動されることを特徴とする遊技機C6。   In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the game machine includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the restriction of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, the transmission member abuts on the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 that is swung.

遊技機C6によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材を伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、伝達部材は第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制が解除される際に、伝達部材が移動部材に当接し、伝達部材の回転に追従して前記移動部材が揺動するので、遊技者に移動部材の揺動の規制が解除されるタイミングを気付きにくくさせることができる。これにより、遊技者が遊技に集中しやすくすることができる。   According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C6 includes a first biasing device that generates a biasing force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. The eccentric cam is configured to rotate about the first axis, and when the restriction of the swing of the moving member by the restriction member is released, the transmission member abuts on the movement member and follows the rotation of the transmission member to move the movement member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing at which the swing restriction of the moving member is released. As a result, the player can easily concentrate on the game.

<移動部材の先端に配置される操作部が振動する技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材に配設され振動を発生可能とされる振動装置と、を備え、前記振動装置の振動の方向と、前記移動部材の長手方向とが互いに傾斜することを特徴とする遊技機D1。
<An example of the technical idea that the operation unit arranged at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a vibration device that is disposed on the moving member and is capable of generating vibrations. And the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined with respect to each other.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、振動装置を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特開2001−120741号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、振動装置の振動が遊技機に伝達されることで遊技機が揺れる等の不具合が生じることを防ぐため、振動を大きくする事が困難であるという問題点があった。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player includes a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-20741). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction such as shaking of the gaming machine due to the vibration of the vibration device being transmitted to the gaming machine. there were.

これに対し、遊技機D1によれば、移動部材の長手方向と、その移動部材に配設される振動装置の振動の方向とが傾斜するので、振動装置が発生させる振動を、移動部材の長手方向に沿った方向成分と、その方向成分の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができ、遊技機に伝達される振動を抑制することができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibration device disposed on the moving member are inclined, the vibration generated by the vibration device is It can be decomposed into a direction component along the direction and a direction component along the direction perpendicular to the direction component, and vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

なお、振動装置としては、直線方向の振動を構成するボイスコイルモータや、偏心した重りを回転させることで振動を生じるバイブレータ等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータの場合、振動の方向とは、ボイスコイルモータが往復動作する方向を意味し、バイブレータの場合、振動の方向とは、重りの回転軸と垂直な方向を意味する。   Examples of the vibration device include a voice coil motor that forms a vibration in a linear direction, and a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

遊技機D1において、前記移動部材を揺動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置が発生する駆動力を前記移動部材へ伝達する伝達部材と、を備え、前記振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、前記振動装置の振動により前記移動部材が移動される方向の反対側に前記伝達部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D2。   The gaming machine D1 includes a driving device that generates a driving force that swings the moving member, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member. A gaming machine D2 comprising a device that generates vibration, wherein the transmission member is disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

遊技機D2によれば、遊技機D1の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が動作する際に生じる反作用が移動部材を伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられるので、振動装置の振動により、移動部材を伝達部材から離反する方向に揺動させることができる。これにより、振動装置の振動により伝達部材が負荷を受けることを抑制することができる。   According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the reaction that occurs when the vibration device operates is directed in the direction of moving the moving member away from the transmission member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibration device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. Thereby, it can suppress that a transmission member receives load by the vibration of a vibration apparatus.

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、前記振動装置が、前記移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、前記振動装置の振動の中心軸が、前記第2軸を通る態様で配置され、その第2軸に振動を吸収する緩衝部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D3。   In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device includes a device that generates a vibration in a linear direction, the vibration device is pivotally supported by a second shaft disposed on the moving member, and vibration of the vibration device is generated. A gaming machine D3, wherein a central axis is disposed in a manner passing through the second axis, and a buffer member that absorbs vibration is disposed on the second axis.

遊技機D3によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、振動装置の振動の中心軸が、第2軸を通る態様で配置され、第2軸に緩衝部材が配設されるので、緩衝部材により振動の衝撃を緩和することができる。これにより、移動部材へ伝わる振動を抑制することができ、遊技機に伝わる振動を抑制することができる。   According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second shaft disposed on the moving member, and the vibration device is configured by a device that generates vibration in a linear direction. The center axis of vibration of the vibration device is arranged in a manner that passes through the second axis, and the buffer member is disposed on the second axis, so that the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the buffer member. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to a moving member can be suppressed and the vibration transmitted to a game machine can be suppressed.

遊技機D3において、前記移動部材は遊技者が押し込み操作する押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込み操作することにより前記第2軸の回転抵抗が上昇する態様で構成されることを特徴とする遊技機D4。   In the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by a player, and is configured to increase the rotational resistance of the second shaft by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

遊技機D4によれば、遊技機D3の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は遊技者が押し込み操作する押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込み操作することにより第2軸の回転抵抗が上昇する態様で構成されるので、遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込み操作する場合に特に、振動装置の回転動作を抑制し、振動成分を大きく確保することができる。これにより、振動装置が第2軸で回転し易くなる状態と、振動装置が振動成分を大きく確保する状態とを遊技者の操作により切り替えることができる。   According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and the pushing resistance of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. Since it is comprised, especially when a player pushes in a pushing member, rotation operation | movement of a vibration apparatus can be suppressed and a vibration component can be ensured largely. Thereby, the state in which the vibration device can easily rotate around the second axis and the state in which the vibration device ensures a large vibration component can be switched by the player's operation.

遊技機D4において、前記振動装置が、前記押し込み部材と剛体として連結されることを特徴とする遊技機D5。   In the gaming machine D4, the vibration device is connected to the push-in member as a rigid body.

遊技機D5によれば、遊技機D4の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が押し込み部材と剛体として連結されるので、遊技者が、押し込み部材を通して振動装置の振動を体感することができる。そのため、押し込み部材を押し込んでいないときには振動装置を振動および第2軸を中心として揺動させて遊技者の注目を振動装置に集め、一方で、押し込み部材を押し込む際には、振動装置の揺動を抑えることで遊技者が感じる直線方向の振動を大きくすることができる。従って、状況(遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込んでいるか否か)に応じて、振動装置の挙動を変化させることができる。   According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the vibration device is connected to the push member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibration device through the push member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed in, the vibrating device is vibrated and swung around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device. On the other hand, when the pushing member is pushed in, the vibrating device is swung. By suppressing this, the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player can be increased. Therefore, the behavior of the vibration device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記振動装置が、前記移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、前記振動装置の振動の中心軸が、第2軸と離間した位置を通る態様で配置されることを特徴とする遊技機D6。   In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by a second shaft disposed on the moving member, and a vibration central axis of the vibration device is disposed in a manner passing through a position separated from the second shaft. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being played.

移動部材と振動装置との連結を軸支としたときに、振動装置の振動の中心軸と軸支位置とを一致させることで遊技者側に伝える振動を大きくすることができる。一方で、この場合、遊技機にも大きな振動が伝わってしまう。そのため、締結ネジの緩みや部材の劣化が早い段階で生じて、メンテナンス周期が早まるという問題点があった。   When the connection between the moving member and the vibration device is an axial support, the vibration transmitted to the player can be increased by matching the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device with the axial support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the gaming machine. For this reason, there has been a problem in that the fastening screw is loosened or the member is deteriorated at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

これに対し、遊技機D6によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、振動装置の回転軸と、振動装置の振動の中心軸とをずらすことで、振動装置を回転させることに振動装置の振動を利用することができ、遊技機に伝わる振動を少なくすることができる(振動のエネルギーが振動装置の回転に使用される)。加えて、振動装置の振動により、振動装置を揺動させることで演出効果を向上させることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, vibration is caused by rotating the vibration device by shifting the rotation shaft of the vibration device and the center axis of vibration of the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be used, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be reduced (vibration energy is used for rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the presentation effect can be improved by swinging the vibration device by the vibration of the vibration device.

遊技機D6において、前記振動装置の振動を検出する検出装置を備え、前記振動装置は、遊技者が把持する操作部材に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D7。   The gaming machine D6 includes a detection device that detects the vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is disposed on an operation member held by a player.

遊技機D7によれば、遊技機D6の奏する効果に加え、遊技者が把持する操作部材に振動装置が配設され、振動装置の振動を検出する検出装置を備えるため、振動装置が振動している最中に操作部材を把持することで振動を抑え、振動装置が検出する信号を変化させることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材を把持しているか(移動部材を操作する準備段階にあるか)を検出することができる。   According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, the vibration device is disposed on the operation member held by the player and includes a detection device that detects the vibration of the vibration device. By grasping the operating member while being held, vibration can be suppressed and a signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. Thereby, it can be detected whether the player is holding the operation member (in a preparation stage for operating the moving member).

<煽りを行う移動部材の入力タイミングを補助する技術思想の一例>
遊技者が入力操作する入力装置を備え、その入力装置は遊技者に対して近接離反する方向に駆動されると共に入力操作を行う部分である入力部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機E1。
<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of a moving member that performs turning>
A gaming machine E1 comprising an input device for a player to perform an input operation, the input device being driven in a direction approaching or moving away from the player and an input unit for performing an input operation.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、入力装置を操作するタイミングが指定される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2012−210238号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、入力装置を操作するタイミングに気を取られ、球を弾く強度の調整がおろそかになるなど、遊技に集中できなくなるという問題点があった。   In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a timing for operating an input device is specified (see, for example, JP 2012-210238 A). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

これに対し、遊技機E1によれば、入力装置の入力部が、遊技者に対して近接離反する方向に駆動されるので、入力部が遊技者に近接する方向に移動し、遊技者の手指に当接したら、それを押し返す態様で入力部を操作させることで、入力部の操作のタイミングを遊技機側で図ることができる。   On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in a direction approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in a direction approaching the player, and the player's finger If it touches, the operation of the input unit can be performed on the gaming machine side by operating the input unit in a manner to push it back.

なお、入力操作としては、押しボタンを押し込み操作する操作や、移動部材に対して引っ張る動作などが例示される。   Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling the moving member.

遊技機E1において、前記入力装置は、直線方向に振動する振動装置を備え、その振動装置の振動方向と、前記入力部を操作する方向とが一致する態様で配置され、前記振動装置が前記入力部に押し付けられる場合には、前記入力部が操作不能とされ、前記振動装置が前記入力部から退避される場合には、前記入力部が操作可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機E2。   In the gaming machine E1, the input device includes a vibration device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in a manner in which a vibration direction of the vibration device coincides with a direction in which the input unit is operated, and the vibration device is the input device. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is not operable when pressed against a part, and the input unit is operable when the vibration device is retracted from the input part.

遊技機E2によれば、遊技機E1の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が入力部に押し付けられる場合には、入力部が操作不能とされ、振動装置が入力部から退避される場合には、入力部が操作可能とされるので、振動装置に、入力装置を振動させる演出効果と、入力部を操作するタイミングを図る効果との両方を持たせることができる。   According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the vibration device is pressed against the input unit, the input unit is disabled, and when the vibration device is retracted from the input unit, the input is performed. Since the unit can be operated, the vibration device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

遊技機E2において遊技者が前記入力部を操作する際に遊技者側に反力を作用させる第1付勢装置の弾性係数が、前記入力部に前記伝達装置が振動を伝達する際に前記振動装置側に反力を作用させる第2付勢装置の弾性係数に比較して小さくされることを特徴とする遊技機E3。   In the gaming machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration coefficient when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. A gaming machine E3 that is made smaller than an elastic coefficient of a second urging device that applies a reaction force to the device side.

遊技機E3によれば、遊技機E2の奏する効果に加え、第2付勢装置の弾性係数に比較して、第1付勢装置の弾性係数が小さくされるので、振動装置を入力装置から離間する位置に復帰させる速度は大きく確保しながら、入力部の操作は小さな力で行うことができる。従って、遊技者が受動的に感じる振動の大きさを確保しつつ、入力部の操作の容易性を向上させることができる。   According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device is made smaller than the elastic coefficient of the second urging device, so that the vibration device is separated from the input device. The operation of the input unit can be performed with a small force while ensuring a large speed for returning to the position to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of vibration that the player feels passively.

遊技機E2又はE3において、前記入力装置は、遊技者が把持可能な大きさの部材であって、前記入力装置を遊技者が把持する際に、掌の位置に入力部を配置可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機E4。   In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be held by a player, and when the player holds the input device, the input unit can be arranged at a palm position. A gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

遊技機E4によれば、遊技機E2又はE3の奏する効果に加え、入力部を備える入力装置が遊技者が把持可能な大きさの部材として形成され、入力装置を遊技者が把持する際に、掌の位置に入力部を配置可能とされるので、入力部の操作の容易性を向上させることができる。即ち、入力装置を把持した状態で、更に握り込むことにより、掌を入力部に押し当てることができ、入力装置を持ち替える等の別の動作を不要とできる。   According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device including the input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, Since the input unit can be arranged at the palm position, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, when the input device is held, the palm can be pressed against the input unit by further grasping, and another operation such as changing the input device can be made unnecessary.

また、入力部を掌で隠すことができるので、入力部が振動する動作を、入力部を把持している遊技者だけに把握させることができる。これにより、他の遊技者には気づかれない態様で、大当たりなどの告知を行うことができる。   In addition, since the input unit can be hidden with a palm, only the player holding the input unit can grasp the vibration of the input unit. Thereby, notifications such as jackpots can be made in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

遊技機E4において、前記入力装置の前記入力部の反対側に手指を係止する係止部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機E5。   In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with a locking portion for locking fingers on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

遊技機E5によれば、遊技機E4の奏する効果に加え、入力装置を把持した際に、入力部側の振動を掌で受け止めて、係止部に手指を引っ掛けることで、振動装置による振動を掌の内側に閉じ込めることができる。これにより、遊技者が感じる振動を大きく確保することができる。   According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input unit side is received by the palm and the finger is hooked on the locking unit, so that the vibration by the vibration device can be obtained. Can be confined inside the palm. Thereby, the vibration which a player feels can be ensured largely.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はスロットマシンであることを特徴とする遊技機F1。中でも、スロットマシンの基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の動的表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(ストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備えた遊技機」となる。この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。   One of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機であることを特徴とする遊技機F2。中でも、パチンコ遊技機の基本構成としては操作ハンドルを備え、その操作ハンドルの操作に応じて球を所定の遊技領域へ発射し、球が遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された作動口に入賞(又は作動口を通過)することを必要条件として、表示手段において動的表示されている識別情報が所定時間後に確定停止されるものが挙げられる。また、特別遊技状態の発生時には、遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された可変入賞装置(特定入賞口)が所定の態様で開放されて球を入賞可能とし、その入賞個数に応じた有価価値(景品球のみならず、磁気カードへ書き込まれるデータ等も含む)が付与されるものが挙げられる。   One of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機とスロットマシンとを融合させたものであることを特徴とする遊技機F3。中でも、融合させた遊技機の基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備え、遊技媒体として球を使用すると共に、前記識別情報の動的表示の開始に際しては所定数の球を必要とし、特別遊技状態の発生に際しては多くの球が払い出されるように構成されている遊技機」となる。
<その他>
<手段>
技術的思想1記載の遊技機は、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材の移動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機において、前記移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され前記規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、前記被規制部材が、前記規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、前記操作部材に荷重が作用することにより、前記移動部材の形状が変形可能に構成される。
技術的思想2記載の遊技機は、技術的思想1記載の遊技機において、前記移動部材は、前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、前記被規制部材が前記規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされる。
技術的思想3記載の遊技機は、技術的思想1又は2に記載の遊技機において、前記移動部材を支持する支持部材を備え、前記移動部材を構成する前記操作部材および前記被規制部材は前記支持部材に配設される第1軸に同軸で軸支され、前記移動部材の移動は、前記第1軸を中心とした揺動である。
<効果>
技術的思想1記載の遊技機によれば、規制部材の耐久性を良好にすることができる。
技術的思想2記載の遊技機によれば、技術的思想1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、規制部材への荷重の伝達を遮断する。
技術的思想3記載の遊技機によれば、技術的思想1又は2に記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、規制部材の耐久性をより向上できる。
Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
<Means>
A gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a restricting member that restricts movement of the moving member. The moving member includes: an operating member operated by a player; and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of regulating movement by the regulating member, wherein the regulated member is the regulating member. In a state where movement is restricted, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load to the operating member.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the moving member is in a fixed state in which the operation member is fixed to the regulated member, and the regulated member is used as the regulating member. It is possible to configure a non-transmission state in which at least the operation member is movable relative to the regulated member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the operation member in a state where movement is restricted. It is said.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and includes a support member that supports the moving member, and the operation member and the regulated member that constitute the moving member are A first shaft disposed on the support member is coaxially supported, and the movement of the moving member is a swing around the first shaft.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the durability of the regulating member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the transmission of the load to the regulating member is blocked.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the durability of the regulating member can be further improved.

10 パチンコ機(遊技機)
310 首振り操作部材(操作部材の一部、入力装置の一部)
311a 挿通孔(係止部)
313d 第2センサ部材(検出装置)
317 レンズ部材(入力装置の一部、入力部、押し込み部材)
330、3330、5330、8330、10330 内側ケース部材(支持部材の一部)
331d1 レバー支持軸(第1軸、第2軸)
331d2 偏心カム軸(第1軸)
333、2333、4333、6333 偏心カム部材(伝達部材)
333b 筒状部(円筒部)
335 第1駆動装置(駆動装置)
336、4336、5336、8336 ロック部材(規制部材)
338 ギアダンパ(制動手段)
340、2340、3340、4340、7340、9340 レバー部材(移動部材の一部)
350、4350、7350、 剥離部材(被規制部材の一部)
363 軸支棒(第2軸)
364 緩衝部材
366 振動装置(演出部材の一部、振動装置)
366b 押し付け部材(振動部)
2333a 本体部材(回転ギア)
2333b カム部材(偏心カム)
5336a1 湾曲壁部(凹設部)
CS1 振動コイルスプリング(第2付勢装置)
CS2 押し込みコイルスプリング(第1付勢装置)
M41 電磁石部材(電磁石)
SP1、SP21、SP31、SP41、SP101 ねじりバネ(第1付勢部材)
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d Second sensor member (detection device)
317 Lens member (part of input device, input unit, push-in member)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330 Inner case member (part of support member)
331d1 Lever support shaft (first axis, second axis)
331d2 Eccentric cam shaft (first shaft)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336 Locking member (regulating member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340 Lever member (part of moving member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (second shaft)
364 Buffer member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Body member (rotating gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall (concave part)
CS1 Vibrating coil spring (second biasing device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (first biasing device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first biasing member)

Claims (2)

遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材の移動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機において、
前記移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され前記規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、
前記移動部材の少なくとも一部は、前記操作部材の操作中に前記被規制部材が前記規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、前記操作部材に、前記移動部材の少なくとも一部を前記被規制部材に対する所定の基準配置に維持するように作用する力以上の荷重が作用することにより、前記所定の基準配置から変位可能に構成され、
前記規制部材は、移動可能に構成され、前記移動部材の少なくとも一部であって前記変位が生じた部分が前記所定の基準配置に戻った時の位置で、前記被規制部材を、遊技者側から前記操作部材に前記荷重が作用していない状態で維持可能に構成され
前記移動部材の少なくとも一部は、
前記第1位置に前記移動部材が配置された場合における前記所定の基準配置からの変位量が所定量まで許容され、
前記第2位置に前記移動部材が配置された場合における前記所定の基準配置からの変位量が前記所定量よりも大きな第2所定量まで許容されることを特徴とする遊技機。
In a gaming machine comprising: a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation; and a regulating member that regulates movement of the moving member.
The moving member includes an operating member operated by a player, and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of regulating movement by the regulating member,
At least a part of the moving member is placed on the operating member while the restricted member is restricted from moving by the restricting member during operation of the operating member. load exceeding the force acting to maintain a predetermined reference arrangement by acting, displaceably constructed from the predetermined reference arrangement for,
The restricting member is configured to be movable, and the restricted member is placed on the player side at a position when at least a part of the moving member and the portion where the displacement occurs returns to the predetermined reference arrangement. the load is configured to be maintained in a state of not acting on the operating member from,
At least a part of the moving member is
The amount of displacement from the predetermined reference arrangement when the moving member is arranged at the first position is allowed up to a predetermined amount,
Gaming machine displacement from the predetermined reference arrangement in a case where the moving member is disposed in said second position, characterized in Rukoto be tolerated to a greater second predetermined amount than the predetermined amount.
基板ボックスを備えることを特徴とする請求項1記載の遊技機。   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.
JP2015016533A 2015-01-30 2015-01-30 Game machine Active JP6566649B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015016533A JP6566649B2 (en) 2015-01-30 2015-01-30 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015016533A JP6566649B2 (en) 2015-01-30 2015-01-30 Game machine

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2014222051 Division 2014-10-30 2014-10-30

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2018097030A Division JP2018140225A (en) 2018-05-21 2018-05-21 Game machine

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2016087403A JP2016087403A (en) 2016-05-23
JP6566649B2 true JP6566649B2 (en) 2019-08-28

Family

ID=56017516

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2015016533A Active JP6566649B2 (en) 2015-01-30 2015-01-30 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6566649B2 (en)

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003102901A (en) * 2001-10-01 2003-04-08 Heiwa Corp Lever switch device for game machine
JP3983106B2 (en) * 2002-05-31 2007-09-26 山佐株式会社 Switch for gaming machine and gaming machine
JP4676823B2 (en) * 2005-06-22 2011-04-27 マルホン工業株式会社 Slot machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2016087403A (en) 2016-05-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6686331B2 (en) Amusement machine
JP6451215B2 (en) Game machine
JP6631101B2 (en) Gaming machine
JP6044693B2 (en) Game machine
JP6041032B2 (en) Game machine
JP6194936B2 (en) Game machine
JP2020124637A (en) Game machine
JP2017029851A (en) Game machine
JP6451214B2 (en) Game machine
JP6265106B2 (en) Game machine
JP2020124638A (en) Game machine
JP2020116474A (en) Game machine
JP2022079745A (en) Game machine
JP2022132650A (en) game machine
JP6428747B2 (en) Game machine
JP6566649B2 (en) Game machine
JP2019166356A (en) Game machine
JP2019037873A (en) Game machine
JP6687087B2 (en) Amusement machine
JP2018140225A (en) Game machine
JP2018057933A (en) Game machine
JP2021049452A (en) Game machine
JP2019111425A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20160215

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20170117

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20170321

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20170718

A02 Decision of refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A02

Effective date: 20180220

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20180521

A911 Transfer to examiner for re-examination before appeal (zenchi)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A911

Effective date: 20180522

A912 Re-examination (zenchi) completed and case transferred to appeal board

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A912

Effective date: 20180803

A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20190311

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20190730

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 6566649

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250

R250 Receipt of annual fees

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R250